manualshive.com logo in svg

Canon imagePROGRAF iPF8300, User Manual

The Canon imagePROGRAF iPF8300 is a high-performance printer that delivers exceptional quality prints. For users looking to maximize its features, the Basic Manual is available for download, absolutely free. Access this invaluable resource from 88.208.23.73:8080 to learn everything you need to know about operating this top-of-the-line printer.

Share
Download
background image

Printing procedure

Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets ............................................................................................................

2

 

Loading and Printing on Rolls .............................................................................................................................

3

Loading and Printing on Sheets ..........................................................................................................................

6

 

Printing in Windows ............................................................................................................................................

8

Printing from Mac OS X ......................................................................................................................................

9

Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets

The printer supports both rolls and sheets.
This section introduces the main features of each, as well as the main printing methods available. Select rolls or sheets to
suit your particular printing application.

Note

•

For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. 

 (See "

Types

of Paper

.")

→P.768

•

A variety of other ways to print are available besides those introduced here. Choose the printing method that
suits  your  particular  printing  application,  referring  to  "Working  with  Various  Print  Jobs"  and  "Enhanced
Printing Options" from the table of contents.

Roll printing

Media in spooled rolls is generally called Roll Media. Rolls are loaded on the Roll Holder, which are in turn loaded in the
printer.
Rolls can be used to print large photos or create posters or banners that cannot be printed on regular sheets.

•

Large-format printing
Easily print vertical or horizontal banners from familiar applications such as Microsoft Office applications.

 (See "

Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing)

.")

→P.110

•

Borderless printing
Print without a margin (border) around posters or photos.

 (See "

Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size

.")

→P.95

 (See "

Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width

.")

→P.102

 (See "

Borderless Printing at Actual Size

.")

→P.88

•

Banner printing
You can print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.

 (See "

Printing Multiple Pages Continuously

.")

→P.133

•

90-degree rotation before printing
Originals in portrait orientation are rotated 90 degrees when possible to use paper more efficiently.

 (See "

Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees

.")

→P.161

•

Enlarged/reduced printing
You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing originals before printing.

 (See "

Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size

.")

→P.61

 (See "

Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width

.")

→P.67

 (See "

Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value

.")

→P.73

•

Free Layout function
Print multiple documents from multiple applications (such as word-processing programs, spreadsheet programs, and so
on) next to each other.

 (See "

Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other

.")

→P.128

Basic Printing Workflow 

>

 Printing procedure 

>

Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets

iPF8300

1

2

Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals

Summary of Contents for imagePROGRAF iPF8300

Page 1: ... 41 3 Windows Software 195 4 Mac OS X Software 477 5 Print Jobs 713 6 Handling Paper 767 7 Adjustments for Better Print Quality 836 8 Printer Parts 880 9 Network Setting 947 10 Maintenance 982 11 Troubleshooting 1040 12 Error Message 1078 13 Appendix 1109 14 ver1 20 2010 07 26 ENG Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 2: ...ormat instruction manual included on the User Manuals CD ROM supplied with the printer Thus there are descriptions that are applied only in HTML format and functions video display function etc that cannot be used We appreciate your understanding Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 3: ...nts 35 Printing Office Documents 35 Printing Office Documents Windows 36 Printing Office Documents Mac OS X 37 Enhanced Printing Options 41 Adjusting Images 42 Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver 42 Fine Tuning Colors of Photos and Images Windows 45 Fine Tuning Colors of Photos and Images Mac OS X 48 Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing 51 Choosing the Docum...

Page 4: ...Horizontal Banners Large Format Printing Mac OS X 115 Printing on Non Standard Paper Sizes 119 Printing on Non Standard Paper Sizes Windows 119 Printing on Non Standard Paper Sizes Mac OS X 124 Tiling and multiple pages per sheet 128 Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other 128 Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other Windows 129 Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other Mac OS X ...

Page 5: ...river Settings 196 Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver 198 Confirming Print Settings 200 Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing 201 Using Favorites 203 Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications 205 Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu 207 Main Sheet 209 Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box 213 Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box 213 ...

Page 6: ...ut Objects Automatically 275 Aligning Objects 275 Changing the Object Overlapping Order 277 Pasting a Copied or Cut Object 279 Folded Duplex Window 280 Finished Size Settings Dialog Box 281 Binding Settings Dialog Box 282 Prints using Folded Duplex 283 Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 285 The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 285 Operating Environment 285 Starting Color imageRUNNER ...

Page 7: ...rinting Press Simulation Print 346 Enlarge Reduce and Print 347 Enlarge Reduce and Print Matching Output Media Size 347 Enlarge Reduce and Print Matching Width of Roll Paper 349 Specify Scaling Enlarge Reduce and Print 350 Print with No Borders 351 Customize Media Settings 352 Utilize Print History 352 Confirm Print History Details 353 Apply Print History to an Image 354 Store Print History to Pri...

Page 8: ...ngs in Accounting Manager 430 Automatically Acquiring Print Job Logs at Regular Intervals 431 Canceling Regular Print Job Log Acquisition 431 Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and Regularly Acquired Jobs 431 Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File 432 Showing Job Properties 432 Showing Saving and Loading Selected Unit Cost Data 433 Showing the Total Amount of Ink and Paper Consumed 433 D...

Page 9: ...rinting Application 493 Matching pane 494 Ambient Light Adjust dialog box 497 Light Source Check Tool 499 Color Settings Pane Color 500 Object Adjustment dialog box Color 501 Color Settings Pane Monochrome 502 Object Adjustment dialog box Monochrome 503 Gray Adjustment Pane 504 Page Setup Pane 506 Utility Pane 508 Additional Settings Pane 509 Support Pane 510 Preview 511 The Features of Preview 51...

Page 10: ...ng out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page 567 Selecting an Object 568 Changing the Object Size 568 Moving an Object 569 Rotating an Object 570 Laying out Objects Automatically 571 Aligning Objects 571 Changing the Object Overlapping Order 573 Pasting a Copied or Cut Object 575 Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 576 The Features of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 5...

Page 11: ...Print 636 Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Color 637 Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome 638 Adjust the Colors by Color Matching 642 Print High Quality Adobe RGB16bit Images 643 Prints monochrome photographs with high quality 645 Using Adobe CMM 645 Perform Black Point Compensation 647 Perform Printing Press Simulation Print 648 Enlarge Reduce and Print 649 ...

Page 12: ...rnings 711 Print Jobs 713 Basic Print Job Operations 714 Using the Printer Hard Disk 714 Saving Print Jobs on the Printer Hard Disk 716 Managing the Job Queue Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs 719 Managing Pending Jobs Printing or Deleting Jobs on Hold 722 Printing Saved Jobs 725 Deleting Saved Jobs 731 Moving Saved Jobs 735 Advanced Print Job Operations 741 Saving Print Jobs Sent from Sources Oth...

Page 13: ...sion printing 837 Enhancing Printing Quality 837 Adjusting the Printhead 839 Adjusting the Printhead 839 Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors Head Posi Adj 839 Manual Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors Head Posi Adj 841 Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images Head Height 843 Adjusting the feed amount 845 Adjusting the Feed Amount 845 Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustmen...

Page 14: ...Disk 935 Printer Hard Disk Operations 935 Checking the Free Hard Disk Space 936 Erasing Data on the Printer s Hard Disk 938 Optional accessories 940 Roll Holder Set 940 Media Take up Unit 940 Printer Specifications 942 Specifications 942 Print Area 945 Network Setting 947 Network Setting 948 Network Environment 948 Configuring the IP Address on the Printer 951 Configuring the IP Address Using the ...

Page 15: ...nk Tanks 984 Checking Ink Tank Levels 995 When to Replace Ink Tanks 996 Printheads 998 Printhead 998 Checking for Nozzle Clogging 998 Cleaning the Printhead 999 Replacing the Printhead 1000 Cutter Unit 1011 Cutter Unit 1011 Replacing the Cutter Unit 1011 Maintenance Cartridge 1015 Maintenance Cartridge 1015 Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge 1015 Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge Capac...

Page 16: ... in different colors occurs 1061 Colors in printed images are uneven 1061 Image edges are blurred or white banding occurs 1062 Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen 1063 The contrast becomes uneven during printing 1066 The length of printed images is inaccurate in the feeding direction 1066 Images are printed crooked 1067 Documents are printed in monochrome 1067 Line thickness is not uniform 1067 ...

Page 17: ...derless printing 1092 Messages regarding ink 1094 Ink insufficient 1094 No ink left 1094 Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected 1094 Close Ink Tank Cover 1095 Ink tank is empty 1095 Not much ink is left 1096 No ink tank loaded 1096 Wrong ink tank 1096 Messages regarding printing or adjustment 1097 Cannot execute this command Use other paper 1097 Cannot calibrate 1097 Excessive tem...

Page 18: ... Maximum jobs stored 1105 Mail box full Delete unwanted data 1105 Other Messages 1106 GARO Wxxxx x represents a number 1106 ERROR Exxx xxxx x represents a letter or number 1106 Hardware error xxxxxxxx xxxx x represents a letter or number 1106 Top cover is open 1107 Prepare for parts replacement 1107 Parts replacement time has passed 1107 Unknown file 1107 Calibration There is a problem with the mu...

Page 19: ...Basic Printing Workflow Printing procedure 2 Canceling print jobs 11 Pausing Printing 16 Basic Printing Workflow iPF8300 1 1 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 20: ...ns such as Microsoft Office applications See Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners Large Format Printing P 110 Borderless printing Print without a margin border around posters or photos See Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size P 95 See Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width P 102 See Borderless Printing at Actual Size P 88 Banner printing You can print multipl...

Page 21: ...se steps to load and print on rolls Note If you are not using the optional Media Take up Unit when printing long documents such as banners spread a clean cloth or paper on the floor Use the Output Stacker to prevent long printed documents from being soiled by the floor after they are printed See Using the Output Stacker P 813 For details on supported sizes and types of rolls see Paper Sizes or the...

Page 22: ... Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls P 774 3 Load the roll in the printer See Loading Rolls in the Printer P 777 Basic Printing Workflow Printing procedure Loading and Printing on Rolls iPF8300 1 4 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 23: ...he type of paper See Changing the Type of Paper P 784 Note If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have set ManageRemainRoll to On specify the roll length after the type of paper See Specifying the Paper Length P 785 Basic Printing Workflow Printing procedure iPF8300 Loading and Printing on Rolls 1 5 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 24: ...e printer now starts printing the print job Loading and Printing on Sheets These are the basic steps for loading sheets and then printing Follow the steps below to load and print on sheets Note For details on supported types and sizes of paper see Paper Sizes or the Paper Reference Guide See Paper Sizes P 771 See Types of Paper P 768 Basic Printing Workflow Printing procedure Loading and Printing ...

Page 25: ...r and other details Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver Windows P 198 Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver Mac OS X P 480 3 Send the print job Printing in Windows P 8 Printing from Mac OS X P 9 Basic Printing Workflow Printing procedure iPF8300 Loading and Printing on Sheets 1 7 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 26: ...applications before printing Running several applications while printing may interrupt the transfer of print data and affect printing quality 1 In the source application select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions Basic Printing Workflow Printing procedure Printing in Windows iPF8300 1 8 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 27: ...box There are two ways to access the printer driver dialog box as follows From the application See Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications Windows P 205 From the operating system menu See Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu Windows P 207 Printing from Mac OS X Print from the application menu after registering the printer Important We recommend e...

Page 28: ...nting options and enables you to choose the printer specify the range of pages number of copies and so on 2 Select the printer in the Printer list 3 Click Print to start printing As shown in the following illustration you can switch to other panes in this dialog box to complete settings for vari ous methods of printing including enlarged and reduced printing borderless printing and so on Basic Pri...

Page 29: ... button on the Control Panel When you press the Stop button during printing printer operation varies depending on the current status If you press the Stop button before printing starts Pressing the Stop button before printing starts will display a confirmation message To cancel the print job select Yes Basic Printing Workflow Canceling print jobs iPF8300 Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel...

Page 30: ...printed 1 Click the printer icon in the taskbar to display the printer window Note You can also display this window by double clicking the printer icon in the Printers and Faxes or Printers folder accessible through the Windows start menu 2 Right click the job to cancel and select Cancel 3 If the job to cancel is not shown in the printer window that is if the print data has already been received b...

Page 31: ...ter window while they are being sent from the computer After transmission jobs are not displayed even during printing Print jobs are displayed in the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor window from the moment the printer starts re ceiving the print data until the moment printing is finished They are not displayed before print data is sent to the printer even if the computer has started preparing the print d...

Page 32: ... window that can be canceled that is if the print data has already been sent to the printer click Utility to display imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Basic Printing Workflow Canceling print jobs Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X iPF8300 1 14 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 33: ...nceled 5 Exit imagePROGRAF Printmonitor In the printer window click Start Jobs Important Always follow these steps if you cancel print jobs from imagePROGRAF Printmonitor If you do not restart job processing the next job cannot be printed Basic Printing Workflow Canceling print jobs iPF8300 Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X 1 15 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 34: ...s cleared even if you do not set Pause Print to Off and printing from the job queue resumes When paper is advanced When you execute Chg Paper Type in the Paper Menu 1 During printing on the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Job tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Job Menu is displayed 3 Press or to sel...

Page 35: ...Working With Various Print Jobs Printing Photos and Images 18 Printing Office Documents 35 Working With Various Print Jobs iPF8300 2 17 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 36: ...sets that match the type of document to be printed Print targets for photos and images Print Target Description Photo Color Suitable for printing photographic images captured with a digital camera Photo Monochrome Suitable for optimized printing of monochrome photos Poster The best setting for posters Prints using vivid and high impact colors Faithful Color Reproduc tion Prints by minimizing color...

Page 37: ... at high resolution when quality is most important Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in Standard or Draft modes but this mode offers exceptional printing quality Standard Choose this setting to print at standard resolution when quality and speed are both important Printing takes less time than in Highest or High mode Draft Choose this setting to print faster Printing in draft mode c...

Page 38: ...lect is loaded in the printer Note The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software as well as on the Control Panel is updated when you install the Media Configuration Tool from the User Software CD ROM or if you change paper information by using the Media Configuration Tool For details see Media Configura tion Tool P 440 5 After confirming that DEasy Settings is selected click Ph...

Page 39: ...s see Printer Driver Settings Windows P 196 11 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For instructions on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 200 Printing Photos and Images Mac OS X This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example Document Photo image from a digital camera Page size 10 12 inches 254 0 304 8 mm Paper Roll paper Pape...

Page 40: ...upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click 10 x12 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software menu Working With V...

Page 41: ...ge paper information by using the Media Configuration Tool For details see Media Con figuration Tool P 671 7 After confirming that DEasy Settings is selected click Photo Color in the EPrint Target list Note For information on settings optimized for printing photos and images see Printing Photos and Im ages P 18 You can check the settings values selected in the EPrint Target list by clicking GView ...

Page 42: ...Roll Width list in this case 10 in 254 0mm Note If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll Width click LPrinter Informa tion on the Main pane to update the printer information Working With Various Print Jobs Printing Photos and Images Printing Photos and Images Mac OS X iPF8300 2 24 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 43: ...ho toshop and customize for your printing needs By using the plug in you can print while preserving the 16 bit RGB data from Photoshop without losing the exceptional color gradations of original image Some of the settings and customizations available in the plug in are as follows Automatic detection of the color space sRGB or Adobe RGB for automatic selection of the optimal profile This fea ture e...

Page 44: ...escribes how to print Adobe RGB images based on the following example Document Adobe RGB image created in Photoshop Page Size 10 12 inches 254 0 304 8 mm Paper Roll Paper type Premium Glossy Paper 200 Roll Paper Width 10 inches 254 0 mm Important In Photoshop select no color matching In the printer driver settings select Driver Matching Mode and choose Adobe RGB in Color Space 1 In Photoshop creat...

Page 45: ...is loaded In this case click Premium Glossy Paper 200 9 Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode 10 Click Image in the EPrint Priority list Working With Various Print Jobs Printing Photos and Images iPF8300 Printing Adobe RGB Images Windows 2 27 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 46: ...lity list vary depending on the paper type 12 Click Color in the GColor Mode list 13 Click HColor Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box Working With Various Print Jobs Printing Photos and Images Printing Adobe RGB Images Windows iPF8300 2 28 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 47: ...ing Mode click Driver Matching Mode 16 In CColor Space click Adobe RGB 17 Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box Working With Various Print Jobs Printing Photos and Images iPF8300 Printing Adobe RGB Images Windows 2 29 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 48: ... Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 200 Printing Adobe RGB Images Mac OS X This topic describes how to print Adobe RGB images based on the following example Document Adobe RGB image created in Photoshop Page size 10 12 inches 254 0 304 8 mm Paper Roll Paper type Premium Glossy Paper 200 Roll paper width...

Page 49: ... to the Photoshop documentation 2 Choose Print with Preview from the Photoshop menu to display the Print dialog box 3 Make sure the setting mode is Color Management 4 In the Color Handling list in Options click No Color Management 5 Click Print 6 Access the Main pane 7 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this case click Premium Glossy Paper 200 Working With Various P...

Page 50: ... paper 11 Click Color in the HColor Mode list 12 Click ISet to display the Color Settings dialog box 13 Click Matching to display the Matching pane 14 In Matching Mode click Driver Matching Mode 15 In Color Space click Adobe RGB 16 Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box Working With Various Print Jobs Printing Photos and Images Printing Adobe RGB Images Mac OS X iPF8300 2 32 Downloaded fr...

Page 51: ... of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll Width click LPrinter Informa tion on the Main pane to update the printer information 20 Make sure CPage Size in the Page Setup pane matches the size of the original as specified in Photoshop in this case 10 x12 Working With Various Print Jobs Printing Photos and Images iPF8300 Printing Adobe RGB Images Mac OS X 2 33 Downloaded from ManualsPr...

Page 52: ...o start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 482 Working With Various Print Jobs Printing Photos and Images Printing Adobe RGB Images Mac OS X iPF8300 2 34 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 53: ...or Printing P 51 Print Quality Choose the print quality The printing mode is determined by a combination of the print quality and resolution Print Quality Description Highest A setting for printing at the highest resolution when quality is most important Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in other modes but this mode offers superior printing quality High Choose this setting to print ...

Page 54: ... Page size A4 210 0 297 0 mm 8 3 11 7 in Paper Sheets Paper type Plain Paper Paper size A4 210 0 297 0 mm 8 3 11 7 in 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driv er Dialog Box from Applications Windows P 205 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list select the typ...

Page 55: ...itions For details on available printing conditions see Printer Driver Settings Windows P 196 10 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 200 Printing Office Documents Mac OS X This topic describes how to print office documents based on the following example Document Office document created using word process...

Page 56: ...in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 for Paper Tray Large Mar gins 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the app...

Page 57: ...ngs is selected click Office Document in the EPrint Target list Note You can check the settings values selected in the EPrint Target list by clicking GView set 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list Working With Various Print Jobs Printing Office Documents iPF8300 Printing Office Documents Mac OS X 2 39 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 58: ...rgins 12 Specify additional printing conditions For details on available printing conditions see Printer Driver Settings Mac OS X P 478 13 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 482 Working With Various Print Jobs Printing Office Documents Printing Office Documents Mac OS X iPF8300 2 40 ...

Page 59: ...rless Printing 95 Printing banners or at other non standard sizes 110 Tiling and multiple pages per sheet 128 Centering originals 149 Conserving roll paper 161 Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals 175 Checking Images Before Printing 178 Other useful settings 180 Enhanced Printing Options iPF8300 3 41 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 60: ...rint in grayscale You can adjust the color balance No color correction 1 Prints without performing color matching in the printer driver You can adjust the color balance 1 If No color correction is selected the Matching sheet Matching pane is not displayed Color Adjustment You can adjust colors separately for images graphics and text documents Adjustment Item Description Cyan Fine tune color tones ...

Page 61: ...ethod Available when using Windows Host ICM Mode Enables color matching by the host computer using the ICM function of Windows Select this if you want to print from an application that supports the ICM function ColorSync Enables color matching by using the ColorSync function of Mac OS Select this if you want to perform soft proofing using ColorSync before printing Available when using Mac OS Match...

Page 62: ...Color Mode Gray Adjustment Items Description Color Balance Adjust the gray tone to suit the images of monochrome photos Choose cool black tinged with blue pure black neutral warm black tinged with red and so on Select the color tone in the color region or from the list Brightness Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest por tions intact Contrast Adjust the con...

Page 63: ...application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driv er Dialog Box from Applications Windows P 205 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images iPF8300 Fine Tuning Colors of Photos and Images Windows 3 45 Downloaded...

Page 64: ...e 6 Click Color in the GColor Mode list 7 Click HColor Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images Fine Tuning Colors of Photos and Images Windows iPF8300 3 46 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 65: ... tions intact IContrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the contrast JSaturation Adjust the level of color saturation in a range from subdued to vivid Note Click Object Adjustment to open the Object Adjustment dialog box which allows you to select the color adjustment target from Im...

Page 66: ...Page Setup is displayed in the application menu the settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup If it is not displayed the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 Choose the original size in the FPaper Size list 4 If you config...

Page 67: ...pe of paper that is loaded 7 Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode 8 Click Color in the HColor Mode list Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images iPF8300 Fine Tuning Colors of Photos and Images Mac OS X 3 49 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 68: ...djust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest por tions intact IContrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the contrast JSaturation Adjust the level of color saturation in a range from subdued to vivid Note Click Object Adjustment to open the Object Adj...

Page 69: ...rinting results that appear just as expected for your original you can specify which graphic elements and colors to prioritize for printing Note Easy Settings are also available providing convenient presets To use the presets simply choose the printing application For details on Easy Settings refer to the following topics Printing Photos and Images P 18 Printing Office Documents P 35 Print Priorit...

Page 70: ... resolution when quality is most important Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in other modes but this mode offers superior printing quality Image High Choose this setting to print at high resolution when quality is most important Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in Standard or Draft modes but this mode offers exceptional printing quality Image Line Drawing Text Standa...

Page 71: ...e RGB Choose a standard color space sRGB or an expanded color space Adobe RGB 1 Options suitable for the selected Print Priority and Media Type are listed under Color Mode 2 The order of options displayed varies depending on the operating system 3 Adobe RGB is not available if an incompatible combination of the paper type and print quality is selected Enhancing printing quality Setting Item Descri...

Page 72: ...t settings instead of using the Print Target presets This topic describes how print photo graphic images in monochrome 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box Refer to Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications Windows P 205 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list select th...

Page 73: ...ending on the type of paper 8 Click Monochrome in the GColor Mode list 9 To adjust the brightness and contrast click HColor Settings Note For instructions on adjusting brightness and contrast see Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver P 42 Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images iPF8300 Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions Windows 3 55 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals...

Page 74: ...so on 12 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For details on how to check the printing settings refer to Confirming Print Settings Windows P 200 Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions Windows iPF8300 3 56 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 75: ...oose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attributes dialog box 2 Select the printer in the BFormat for list 3 Choose the original size in the CPaper Size list 4 Click FOK to close the dialog box 5 In the application menu choose Print Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images iPF8300 Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions Mac OS X 3 57 Downloaded from ManualsPrinte...

Page 76: ...per that is loaded 8 Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode 9 Click Image in the EPrint Priority list Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions Mac OS X iPF8300 3 58 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 77: ...ess and contrast see Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driv er P 42 13 Access the Page Setup pane 14 Confirm the settings of APaper Source and CPage Size 15 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 482 Enhanced Printing Options Adjusting Images iPF8300 Choosing the Document Type and Print...

Page 78: ... If the paper type is not listed for selection If the type of paper loaded cannot be selected try specifying glossy paper or proofing paper as a special paper Special 1 to Special 5 in this order BK Black Ink is used as the black ink Try specifying other types of paper as Special 6 to Spe cial 10 MBK Matte Black Ink is used as the black ink Note that higher numbers in this setting enable more vivi...

Page 79: ...it Paper Size Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using For instructions on resizing originals to match the paper size refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer and operating system Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size Windows P 61 Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size Mac OS X P 63 Note For better printing results when enlarging ph...

Page 80: ...box See Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications Windows P 205 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this case click Plain Paper 5 Select the printing application in the EPrint Target list Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size Windows iPF8300 3 ...

Page 81: ...er Size check box 12 Click ISO A3 in the GPaper Size list 13 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 200 Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size Mac OS X This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the paper size based on the following example Document Any Type Page size A4 210 ...

Page 82: ...gs are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application sof...

Page 83: ...ction in the EPrint Target list 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions iPF8300 Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size Mac OS X 3 65 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 84: ...rmation 12 Make sure CPage Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as specified in CPaper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box in this case ISO A4 13 Select the DEnlarged Reduced Printing check box 14 Make sure EFit Paper Size is selected 15 Click ISO A3 in the IPaper Size list Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size Ma...

Page 85: ...our computer and operating system Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Windows P 67 Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Mac OS X P 70 Note For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format use an im age editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of 150 dpi or more at actual size Resizing Originals to Fit...

Page 86: ...og Box from Applications Windows P 205 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this case click Plain Paper 5 Select the printing application in the EPrint Target list Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Windows iPF8300 3 68 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manua...

Page 87: ...ication In this case click ISO A4 or Letter 8 5 x11 9 Select the CEnlarged Reduced Printing check box Note If the CEnlarged Reduced Printing check box is not displayed on the Page Setup sheet clear the BBorderless Printing check box Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions iPF8300 Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Windows 3 69 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 88: ...n confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 200 Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Mac OS X This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width based on the following example Document Any Type Page size A4 210 0 297 0 mm 8 3 11 7 in Paper Roll paper Paper type Plain Paper Roll paper width 16 inches 406 4 mm Enhanced Printing Options P...

Page 89: ...rt of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software menu Enhanced Printing Opti...

Page 90: ...ection in the EPrint Target list 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Mac OS X iPF8300 3 72 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 91: ...t the DEnlarged Reduced Printing check box 14 Click FFit Roll Paper Width 15 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 482 Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired Enlarged Reduced Printing Enlarge or...

Page 92: ...zing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value Windows This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value based on the following example Document Any Type Page size A4 210 0 297 0 mm 8 3 11 7 in Paper Roll paper Paper type Plain Paper Roll paper width A2 A3 roll 420 0 mm 16 5 in Important In borderless printing you cannot resize originals by entering a scaling va...

Page 93: ... case click Plain Paper 5 Select the printing application in the EPrint Target list 6 Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions iPF8300 Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value Windows 3 75 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 94: ...not be printed If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size the original is printed in the upper left corner In this case you can center originals by selecting EPrint Centered on the Layout sheet 13 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 200 Resizing Originals by Enteri...

Page 95: ...is not displayed the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Pri...

Page 96: ...ion in the EPrint Target list 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value Mac OS X iPF8300 3 78 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 97: ... on the Main pane to update the printer information 12 Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box in this case ISO A4 13 Select the DEnlarged Reduced Printing check box Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions iPF8300 Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value Mac OS X 3 79 Downloaded from Manuals...

Page 98: ...original is printed in the upper left corner In this case you can center originals by selecting the JPrint Centered check box 15 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 482 Enhanced Printing Options Printing enlargements or reductions Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value Mac OS ...

Page 99: ...an original for printing without a margin and print it on paper of regular size the image near the edge will not be printed Oversize The margin required by the printer is added around the outside of a regular paper size For example when printing a A4 sized original 210 297 mm you have the following options a Regular paper size Gray area not printed b Page Size c Oversized paper size Print area mat...

Page 100: ...nting refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer and operating system Printing at Full Size Windows P 82 Printing at Full Size Mac OS X P 84 Printing at Full Size Windows This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example Oversized Printing Document Any Type Page Size A4 210 0 297 0 mm Letter 8 3 11 7 in Paper Roll Paper type Plain Paper Roll paper wi...

Page 101: ...s loaded In this case click Plain Paper 5 Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet 6 Click OSize Options to display the Paper Size Options dialog box Enhanced Printing Options Printing at full size iPF8300 Printing at Full Size Windows 3 83 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 102: ... 0mm 12 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 200 Printing at Full Size Mac OS X This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example Oversized Printing Document Any Type Page size A4 210 0 297 0 mm 8 3 11 7 in Paper Roll paper Paper type Plain Paper Roll paper width A2 A3 roll 420...

Page 103: ... in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In FPaper Size click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 Oversize 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software menu Enhanc...

Page 104: ... 7 Make your selection in the EPrint Target list 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Printing at full size Printing at Full Size Mac OS X iPF8300 3 86 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 105: ...printer information 12 Make sure CPage Size shows the original size as specified in CPaper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box in this case ISO A4 Oversize 13 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 482 Enhanced Printing Options Printing at full size iPF8300 Printing at Full Size Mac O...

Page 106: ...ected When borderless printing is used the edge of the paper is cut during printing Thus ink density may be un even at the edges If you require higher image quality specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver In this case the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only After ejecting and cutting the printed document use scissors to cut away the top and bottom edges By fa...

Page 107: ...erlessly at actual size based on the following example Document Any type Page size 10 12 inches 254 0 304 8 mm Paper Roll Paper type Heavyweight Coated Paper Roll paper width 10 inches 254 0 mm 1 Create the original in the source application 3 mm 0 12 in larger on each side than 254 0 304 8 mm 10 12 in that is 260 0 310 8 mm 10 2 12 2 in Note If you can specify the margin as in Microsoft Word set ...

Page 108: ...ed In this case click Heavyweight Coated Paper 6 Select the print target in the EPrint Target list 7 Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet Enhanced Printing Options Printing at full size Borderless Printing at Actual Size Windows iPF8300 3 90 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 109: ...ox 13 In CBorderless Printing Method click FPrint Image with Actual Size 14 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 200 Borderless Printing at Actual Size Mac OS X This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example Document Any Type Page size 10 12 inches 254 0 304 8...

Page 110: ... displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list choose a paper size supported for borderless printing Here click 10 x12 Borderless Note Paper sizes supported for borderless printing are indicated by Borderless 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog bo...

Page 111: ... 7 Make your selection in the EPrint Target list 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Printing at full size iPF8300 Borderless Printing at Actual Size Mac OS X 3 93 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 112: ... update the printer information 12 Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box in this case 10 x12 Borderless 13 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 482 Enhanced Printing Options Printing at full size Borderle...

Page 113: ...sides only These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing special page layouts centering origi nals and printing cut lines on rolls If Fit Paper Size or Print Image with Actual Size Windows only is selected when performing borderless printing Rotate Page 90 degrees Conserve Paper cannot be selected When borderless printing is used the edge of the paper is cut during printing...

Page 114: ...his topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the paper size based on the following example Document Any type Page size 10 12 inches 254 0 304 8 mm Paper Roll Paper type Heavyweight Coated Paper Roll paper width 10 inches 254 0 mm 1 In the application create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size Note If you can specify the margin as in Micr...

Page 115: ...e click Heavyweight Coated Paper 6 Select the print target in the EPrint Target list 7 Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet Enhanced Printing Options Borderless Printing iPF8300 Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size Windows 3 97 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 116: ...click DFit Paper Size 14 Click Match Page Size in the GPaper Size list 15 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 200 Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size Mac OS X This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the paper size based on the follow...

Page 117: ...printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click 10 x12 Note All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to match the paper size 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the ...

Page 118: ...lection in the EPrint Target list 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Borderless Printing Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size Mac OS X iPF8300 3 100 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 119: ...e CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box in this case 10 x12 13 On the Page Setup pane select the DEnlarged Reduced Printing check box 14 Select the HBorderless Printing check box 15 Click EFit Paper Size under DEnlarged Reduced Printing Enhanced Printing Options Borderless Printing iPF8300 Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals...

Page 120: ...uts centering origi nals and printing cut lines on rolls If Fit Paper Size or Print Image with Actual Size Windows only is selected when performing borderless printing Rotate Page 90 degrees Conserve Paper cannot be selected When borderless printing is used the edge of the paper is cut during printing Thus ink density may be un even at the edges If you require higher image quality specify No in Au...

Page 121: ...h Windows This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the roll width based on the following ex ample Document Any type Page size A4 210 0 297 0 mm Letter 8 3 11 7 in Paper Roll Paper type Heavyweight Coated Paper Roll paper width 10 inches 254 0 mm 1 In the application create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size Note If you can specify ...

Page 122: ...e click Heavyweight Coated Paper 6 Select the print target in the EPrint Target list 7 Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet Enhanced Printing Options Borderless Printing Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Windows iPF8300 3 104 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 123: ...e EScale to fit Roll Paper Width is selected 14 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 200 Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Mac OS X This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the roll width based on the following ex ample Document Any Ty...

Page 124: ...when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 Note All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to fit the roll width 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select ...

Page 125: ...election in the EPrint Target list 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Borderless Printing iPF8300 Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Mac OS X 3 107 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 126: ... Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box in this case ISO A4 13 Select the DEnlarged Reduced Printing check box 14 Select the HBorderless Printing check box This ensures that FFit Roll Paper Width is automatically selected in DEnlarged Reduced Printing Enhanced Printing Options Borderless Printing Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals...

Page 127: ...ing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 482 Enhanced Printing Options Borderless Printing iPF8300 Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width Mac OS X 3 109 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 128: ...larging or reducing originals to fit the full width of rolls Note The maximum supported roll length is 18 0 m or 19 7 yd For instructions on printing vertical or horizontal banners refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer and operating system Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners Large Format Printing Windows P 111 Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners Large Format Printi...

Page 129: ...in is registered 2 In the application create an original in the size you registered 3 Print the banner using the settings that correspond to banners Registering a Custom Paper Size This example describes how to register a paper size that is horizontally elongated and suitable for banners in either horizon tal or vertical format 1 Display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driv...

Page 130: ...he File menu to display the Page Setup dialog box 3 Under Paper Size click the Custom Paper Size you registered My Horizontal Banner in this example Important If My Horizontal Banner is not listed make sure this printer is selected as the printer to use In applications such as Microsoft PowerPoint that do not enable you to choose registered paper sizes use the custom paper size setting in Custom a...

Page 131: ...er confirming that DEasy Settings is selected click Poster in the EPrint Target list 6 Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non standard sizes iPF8300 Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners Large Format Printing Windows 3 113 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 132: ...click EFit Roll Paper Width the Information dialog box is displayed 11 Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list In this case click 16 in Roll 406 4mm and then click OK 12 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 200 Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non standard si...

Page 133: ...S X This topic describes how to print a banner about five times as long as the roll width based on the following example Document An original designed for a horizontal banner Page Size Non standard 100 500 mm 3 9 19 7 in Paper Roll Paper type Plain Paper Roll paper width 16 inches 406 4 mm Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non standard sizes iPF8300 Printing Vertical or Horizo...

Page 134: ...edures are based on Mac OS X 10 5 The method of setting up non standard paper sizes varies depending on the version of Mac OS X Register a Custom Page Sizes This example describes how to register and print using a page size that is horizontally elongated and suitable for banners in either horizontal or vertical format 1 Create the document in the application 2 Choose Print in the application menu ...

Page 135: ...case click 100 500 the size you registered 10 In DOrientation click the icon of the document in landscape orientation 11 Click FOK to close the dialog box Print the banner Follow the steps below to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Access the Main pane 3 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this case clic...

Page 136: ...th of the loaded roll is not displayed in BRoll Width click LPrinter Information on the Main pane and update the printer information 9 In CPage Size make sure 100 500 is displayed as registered in Page Setup Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non standard sizes Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners Large Format Printing Mac OS X iPF8300 3 118 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter co...

Page 137: ...ill not be available after you exit the appli cation If you want to set up a non standard paper size so that it will always be available we recommend registering the paper size in the printer driver Note These temporary paper sizes you register on the printer are called Custom Sizes in Windows This can only be configured in Windows For instructions on specifying non standard paper sizes for printi...

Page 138: ...x and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driv er Dialog Box from Applications Windows P 205 4 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 5 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded 6 After confirming that DEasy Settings is selected select from the EPrint Target list Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non standard sizes Printing...

Page 139: ...onfirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 200 Printing by using Custom Paper Size This section describes how to print using Custom Paper Size based on the following example First register a non standard paper size called 430 mm Square as a Custom Paper Size Document Any Type Page Size A square sheet 430 430 mm 16 9 16 9 in Paper Sheets Media Type Any type Paper Size A square...

Page 140: ...riv er Dialog Box from Applications Windows P 205 4 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 5 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded 6 After confirming that DEasy Settings is selected select from the EPrint Target list Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non standard sizes Printing on Non Standard Paper Sizes Windows iPF8300 3 122 Downloaded from ManualsPr...

Page 141: ...ight the other value will be automatically applied based on the original aspect ratio 12 Click Add to register 430 mm Square 13 Click OK to close the Paper Size Options dialog box 14 Click Cut Sheet in the LPaper Source list 15 In the APage Size list click the size you added 430 mm Square 16 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming P...

Page 142: ...9 in Paper Sheets Media Type Any type Paper Size A square sheet 430 430 mm 16 9 16 9 in Note The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10 5 The method of setting up non standard paper sizes varies depending on the version of Mac OS X 1 Create the document in the application 2 Load the square paper 430 430 mm 16 9 16 9 in in the printer 3 Choose Print in the application menu 4 Select the print...

Page 143: ...he Custom Page Sizes dialog box and enter the paper name in this case 430 430 9 Click OK to close the Custom Page Sizes dialog box 10 In the CPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click 430 430 the size you registered 11 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software men...

Page 144: ...ted select from the EPrint Target list 15 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 16 Access the Page Setup pane 17 Click Cut Sheet in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non standard sizes Printing on Non Standard Paper Sizes Mac OS X iPF8300 3 126 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 145: ...s and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 482 Enhanced Printing Options Printing banners or at other non standard sizes iPF8300 Printing on Non Standard Paper Sizes Mac OS X 3 127 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 146: ...ions 145 Printing Large Posters Windows 146 Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other By arranging originals from word processing or spreadsheet programs or web browser screen shots next to each other on single sheets you can create highly expressive presentation materials easy to understand meeting materials and a variety of other printed documents Free Layout Windows Besides combining multi...

Page 147: ...ltiple Originals Next to Each Other Mac OS X P 131 Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other Windows This topic describes how to arrange multiple originals using the Free Layout function Important Free Layout cannot be used in 64 bit version of Windows 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the...

Page 148: ...y the Layout sheet 5 Select the APage Layout check box 6 Click Free Layout in the APage Layout list Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other Windows iPF8300 3 130 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 149: ...d rearranging images refer to the imagePROGRAF Free Layout help topic 9 Print from the imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu Note For details on imagePROGRAF Free Layout functions refer to Free Layout P 255 Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other Mac OS X This topic describes how to use the Free Layout function to arrange multiple originals next to each other before printing 1 Choose Print in the a...

Page 150: ...check box 4 Click MPrint 5 The Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window is displayed Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other Mac OS X iPF8300 3 132 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 151: ... a single continuous image without margins between pages Roll paper banner Important This feature is only available with rolls It cannot be used when printing on sheets During banner printing settings for conserving paper number of copies borderless printing enlargement or reduction and other layout related settings are disregarded For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at ac...

Page 152: ...argement or reduction and other layout related settings are disregarded 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driv er Dialog Box from Applications Windows P 205 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list click the type of paper that is loaded Enhanced Printing Opt...

Page 153: ... Options dialog box 8 Select the BBanner Printing check box 9 Click OK 10 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 200 Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet iPF8300 Printing Multiple Pages Continuously Windows 3 135 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 154: ...ftware you are using If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu the settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup If it is not displayed the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 Click the original size in the CPaper Si...

Page 155: ...e EPrint Target list 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Click Roll Paper Banner in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet iPF8300 Printing Multiple Pages Continuously Mac OS X 3 137 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 156: ... Important This function cannot be combined with the following options Borderless Printing Scaling Originals Windows Banner Printing Windows When printing using this function the Print Centered setting is disabled For instructions on printing multiple pages per sheet refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer and operating system Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet Windows P 138 ...

Page 157: ...Dialog Box from Applications Windows P 205 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this case click Plain Paper 5 Make your selection in the EPrint Target list 6 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet iPF8300 Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet Windows 3 139 Downl...

Page 158: ...ase click ISO A3 or Letter 8 5 x11 9 Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list 10 Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper Width list in this case ISO A2 A3 Roll 420 0mm Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet Windows iPF8300 3 140 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 159: ... For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 200 Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet Mac OS X This topic describes how to print four pages of an original on a single sheet based on the following example Document Any Type Page size A3 297 0 420 0 mm 11 7 16 5 in Paper Roll paper Paper type Plain Paper Roll paper width A2 A3 roll 420 0 mm 16 5 in Enhanced Printing Opt...

Page 160: ... part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A3 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software menu Enhanced Printing O...

Page 161: ...r 7 Access the Main pane 8 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this case click Plain Paper 9 Make your selection in the EPrint Target list 10 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet iPF8300 Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet Mac OS X 3 143 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 162: ...dth list in this case ISO A2 A3 420 0mm Note If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in BRoll Width click LPrinter Informa tion on the Main pane to update the printer information Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet Mac OS X iPF8300 3 144 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 163: ...e printed sheets you can create a post er larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer Page Layout Choose poster printing Important When printing using this function the Print Centered Watermark No Spaces at Top or Bottom Con serve Paper and Page Options settings are disabled For instructions on printing large posters refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer an...

Page 164: ...cument Poster Page size A2 420 0 594 0 mm 16 5 23 4 in Paper Sheets Paper Size A2 420 0 594 0 mm 16 5 23 4 in 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driv er Dialog Box from Applications Windows P 205 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list select the type of pap...

Page 165: ...al as specified in the application In this case click ISO A2 8 Click Cut Sheet in the LPaper Source list 9 Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet iPF8300 Printing Large Posters Windows 3 147 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 166: ...log box On the Pages to Print dialog box clear the check boxes of the portion you do not want to print Click OK to close the Pages to Print dialog box 12 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 200 Enhanced Printing Options Tiling and multiple pages per sheet Printing Large Posters Windows iPF8300 3 148 Down...

Page 167: ...e roll relative to the width For instructions on centering originals when printing on rolls refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer and operating system Printing Originals Centered on Rolls Windows P 149 Printing Originals Centered on Rolls Mac OS X P 151 Printing Originals Centered on Rolls Windows This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based ...

Page 168: ...s loaded In this case click Plain Paper 5 Select the print target in the EPrint Target list 6 Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet Enhanced Printing Options Centering originals Printing Originals Centered on Rolls Windows iPF8300 3 150 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 169: ...k box 12 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 200 Printing Originals Centered on Rolls Mac OS X This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example Document Any Type Page size A4 210 0 297 0 mm 8 3 11 7 in Paper Roll paper Paper type Plain Paper Roll paper ...

Page 170: ... upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software menu Enhanced Prin...

Page 171: ... your selection in the EPrint Target list 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Centering originals iPF8300 Printing Originals Centered on Rolls Mac OS X 3 153 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 172: ... Informa tion on the Main pane to update the printer information 12 Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box in this case ISO A4 13 Select the JPrint Centered check box Enhanced Printing Options Centering originals Printing Originals Centered on Rolls Mac OS X iPF8300 3 154 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 173: ... instructions on centering originals when printing on sheets refer to the following topics as appropriate for your com puter and operating system Printing Originals Centered on Sheets Windows P 155 Printing Originals Centered on Sheets Mac OS X P 158 Printing Originals Centered on Sheets Windows This topic describes how to reduce an original 50 for printing centered on a sheet Document Any Type Pa...

Page 174: ... is loaded In this case click Plain Paper 5 Make your selection in the EPrint Target list 6 Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet Enhanced Printing Options Centering originals Printing Originals Centered on Sheets Windows iPF8300 3 156 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 175: ...ayout tab to display the Layout sheet 13 Select the EPrint Centered check box 14 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 200 Important If you have selected Cut Sheet as the paper source follow the instructions on the printer control pan el to enter the paper size Enhanced Printing Options Centering originals...

Page 176: ... opening the Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup If it is not displayed the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 Cut Sheet 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Att...

Page 177: ... 7 Make your selection in the EPrint Target list 8 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 9 Access the Page Setup pane 10 Click Cut Sheet in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Centering originals iPF8300 Printing Originals Centered on Sheets Mac OS X 3 159 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 178: ...ings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 482 Important If you have selected Cut Sheet as the paper source follow the instructions on the printer control panel to enter the paper size Enhanced Printing Options Centering originals Printing Originals Centered on Sheets Mac OS X iPF8300 3 160 Downloaded from Manual...

Page 179: ... it fits within the roll width This enables you to conserve paper Important If the page would exceed the roll paper width after rotation use this function with Scale to fit Roll Paper Width to print rotated pages For tips on conserving roll paper refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer and operating system Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees Windows P 161 ...

Page 180: ... Select the printer in the dialog box and then open the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications Windows P 205 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this case click Plain Paper Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees Wi...

Page 181: ...he print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 200 Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees Mac OS X This topic describes how to conserve roll paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing based on the following example Document Any Type Page size A4 210 0 297 0 mm 8 3 11 7 in Paper Roll paper Paper t...

Page 182: ...e Attributes dialog box from Page Setup If it is not displayed the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click F...

Page 183: ...d In this case click Plain Paper 7 Access the Page Setup pane 8 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper iPF8300 Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees Mac OS X 3 165 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 184: ...on the Main pane to update the printer information 10 Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box in this case ISO A4 11 Select the LRotate Page 90 degrees check box Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees Mac OS X iPF8300 3 166 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter c...

Page 185: ...ins Printing without the top and bottom margins may cause inconsistency in the size of printed documents de pending on the layout of images or text in your originals For tips on conserving roll paper refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer and operating system Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins Windows P 167 Conserving Roll Paper by Pr...

Page 186: ...log Box from Applications Windows P 205 3 Make sure the Main sheet is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded In this case click Plain Paper Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins Windows iPF8300 3 168 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 187: ... A4 or Letter 8 5 x11 7 Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list 8 Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper Width list in this case ISO A3 A4 Roll 297 0mm Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper iPF8300 Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins Windows 3 169 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 188: ...hout Top and Bottom Margins Mac OS X This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin based on the following example Document Any Type Page size A4 210 0 297 0 mm 8 3 11 7 in Paper Roll paper Paper type Plain Paper Roll paper width A3 A4 roll 297 0 mm 11 7 in Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper Conserving Roll Paper by Printing O...

Page 189: ...rinter driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 4 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software menu Enhanced Printing Options Conserv...

Page 190: ...case click Plain Paper 7 Access the Page Setup pane 8 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins Mac OS X iPF8300 3 172 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 191: ...pane to update the printer information 10 Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box in this case ISO A4 11 Select the KNo Spaces at Top or Bottom check box Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper iPF8300 Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins Mac OS X 3 173 Downloaded from Manu...

Page 192: ...te For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 482 Enhanced Printing Options Conserving roll paper Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins Mac OS X iPF8300 3 174 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 193: ...ltiple applications creating a poster layout for printing Important This function is only supported in Windows PosterArtist sold separately must be installed to use this function 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then open the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications Windows P 205 3 Make sure the Main sh...

Page 194: ...st 7 When you attempt to print PosterArtist starts up and the PageCapture window is displayed At this point the docu ment will not be printed yet 8 Choose the page to load in PosterArtist Enhanced Printing Options Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals iPF8300 3 176 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 195: ...ge originals from multiple applica tions on the same page Note For instructions on editing and rearranging images refer to the PosterArtist Manual 10 Print from the PosterArtist menu Enhanced Printing Options Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals iPF8300 Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals 3 177 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 196: ...t Job Starts Windows While viewing the preview screen you can also adjust orientation or other settings and your changes will be instantly ap plied on the preview screen Note Under some settings and in some environments PageComposer may be started Enhanced Printing Options Checking Images Before Printing Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing iPF8300 3 178 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter ...

Page 197: ...uctions on how to check the layout before printing refer to the following topics Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing Windows P 201 Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing Mac OS X P 484 Enhanced Printing Options Checking Images Before Printing iPF8300 Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing 3 179 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 198: ...ks background images to documents that require special handling Watermark Watermarks are applied to all pages of your document Important Watermarks are not printed if you select poster as the type of page layout The following watermarks are provided CONFIDENTIAL COPY DRAFT FILE COPY FINAL PRELIMINARY PROOF TOP SECRET You can also create your own watermarks Specify the following options to customiz...

Page 199: ... COPY and so on Windows This topic describes how to print with watermarks based on the following example of printing with a FILE COPY water mark Document Any type Page size A2 420 0 594 0 mm 16 5 23 4 in Paper Roll paper Paper type Plain Paper Roll paper width A2 A3 roll 420 0 mm 16 5 in 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driv...

Page 200: ...b to display the Page Setup sheet 7 In APage Size click the size of the original as specified in the application software In this case click ISO A2 8 Select and click a roll paper in the LPaper Source list 9 Select the width of the loaded roll in the MRoll Paper Width list in this case ISO A2 A3 Roll 420 0mm Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings Printing with Watermarks COPY FILE COPY an...

Page 201: ...it Watermark dialog box you can create custom watermarks and change the position and angle of watermarks 13 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 200 Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings iPF8300 Printing with Watermarks COPY FILE COPY and so on Windows 3 183 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Ma...

Page 202: ...inal Orientation Match the Paper Orientation Windows P 184 Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation Mac OS X P 186 Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation Windows This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation based on the fol lowing example Document An original in landscape orientation Page size A4...

Page 203: ...ded In this case click Plain Paper 5 Make your selection in the EPrint Target list 6 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings iPF8300 Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation Windows 3 185 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 204: ... Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 200 Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation Mac OS X This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation based on the fol lowing example Document An original in landscape orientation Page size A4 210 0 297 0 mm 8 3 11 7 in Paper Roll paper ...

Page 205: ...you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 In the FPaper Size list click the size of the original In this case click ISO A4 4 In DOrientation click the icon of the document in landscape orientation 5 If you configured the settings using the Page Attributes dialog box click FOK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application so...

Page 206: ...on in the EPrint Target list 9 Make your selection in the FPrint Quality list 10 Access the Page Setup pane 11 Select and click a roll paper in the APaper Source list Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation Mac OS X iPF8300 3 188 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 207: ... Make sure the CPage Size setting matches the original size as selected in CPaper Size in the Page Attributes dialog box in this case ISO A4 14 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 482 Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings iPF8300 Making the Original Orientation Match the Pap...

Page 208: ...uide See Types of Paper P 768 Automatic Cutting Roll paper is cut automatically after printing If you prefer you can print continuously without cutting the roll or you can print a cut line For instructions on cutting roll paper after printing refer to the following topics as appropriate for your computer and oper ating system Cutting Roll Paper After Printing Windows P 190 Cutting Roll Paper After...

Page 209: ... If you prefer to cut the paper later yourself click Print Cut Guideline 7 Click OK to close the Roll Paper Options dialog box 8 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Windows P 200 Roll paper will be automatically cut after printing Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings iPF8300 Cutting Roll Paper After Pri...

Page 210: ...d application software you are using If Page Setup is displayed in the application menu the settings are configured by opening the Page Attributes dialog box from Page Setup If it is not displayed the settings are configured in the upper part of the printer driver displayed when you select Print from the application software menu 2 Select the printer in the APrinter list 3 Choose the original size...

Page 211: ...in the APaper Source list 7 Access the Main pane 8 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings iPF8300 Cutting Roll Paper After Printing Mac OS X 3 193 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 212: ... has been deactivated on the printer change the auto cut setting on the printer Control Panel 11 Click OK to close the Paper Detailed Settings dialog box 12 Confirm the print settings and then click MPrint to start printing Note For tips on confirming print settings see Confirming Print Settings Mac OS X P 482 Enhanced Printing Options Other useful settings Cutting Roll Paper After Printing Mac OS...

Page 213: ...nt Copy 285 Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 300 Print Plug In for Office 367 Status Monitor 419 Accounting 422 Digital Photo Front Access 434 Device Setup Utility 435 Media Configuration Tool 440 Windows Software iPF8300 4 195 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 214: ...t dialog box 220 Light Source Check Tool 222 Color Adjustment Sheet Monochrome 223 Object Adjustment dialog box Monochrome 224 Gray Adjustment Sheet 225 Page Setup Sheet 227 Output Method dialog box 230 Paper Size Options Dialog Box 231 Layout Sheet 232 Page Options Dialog Box 234 Special Settings Dialog Box 235 Favorites Sheet 236 Utility Sheet 238 Support Sheet 239 Settings Summaries Dialog Box ...

Page 215: ...bient Light Adjust dialog box P 220 Light Source Check Tool P 222 Color Adjustment Sheet Monochrome P 223 Object Adjustment dialog box Monochrome P 224 Gray Adjustment Sheet P 225 Page Setup Sheet P 227 You can specify the page size of the original borderless printing enlargement or reduction the orientation the paper size and feed source and automatic cutting Output Method dialog box P 230 Paper ...

Page 216: ...ls from various source applications on a single page as desired before printing For details see Free Layout P 255 Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy is a feature for automatic enlargement and printing of scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER For details see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy P 285 Important Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy and imagePROGRAF Free Layout cannot be used on 64 b...

Page 217: ...d Note Click the BGet Information button to display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and configure printer driver settings for the feed source and type of paper This function requires that the Status Monitor be installed Windows Software Printer Driver iPF8300 Specifying Paper in the Pr...

Page 218: ...he loaded roll in MRoll Paper Width Note A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications For details on available printing conditions see Printer Driver Settings P 196 Confirming Print Settings There are two ways to confirm the print settings as follows Checking a preview of the settings Checking a print preview Windows Software Printer Driver Conf...

Page 219: ...rless printing selection and other settings information Note To confirm the Print Target specified in Easy Settings click GView Settings on the Main sheet to display the View Settings dialog box Checking a print preview You can check an image of the original just as it will be printed When you activate this feature imagePROGRAF Preview or PageComposer is started before printing Confirming how docu...

Page 220: ...he LOpen Preview When Print Job Starts check box 5 After you click OK when you print a job the imagePROGRAF Preview window will be displayed Note If PageComposer is running access the Special Settings dialog box from the Layout sheet and clear Enable Preview Switching Windows Software Printer Driver Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing iPF8300 4 202 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com M...

Page 221: ...the procedure for registering printing settings that have been changed in the driver as Favorites 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box Refer to Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications P 205 3 Perform normal printing settings The favorite is registered from here 4 Click the Favorites tab to dis...

Page 222: ...u have added is now displayed in AFavorites Note To save a favorite as a file click JExport and specify the file to save Printing using the favorite Follow the steps below to print using the favorite you have registered 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driv er Dialog Box from Appli...

Page 223: ...ialog Box from Applications 1 Choose Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions 2 Select the printer and then display the printer driver dialog box Note The dialog box for specifying printing conditions varies depending on the source application In some cases when you select the printer a sheet for configuring the printer driver is added to the dialog box In the fol...

Page 224: ...tes Utility and Support Note The titles of dialog boxes may vary depending on the application and sheets other than these six sheets may be displayed Windows Software Printer Driver Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications iPF8300 4 206 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 225: ...ws system menu To use the settings continuously in all applications open the printer driver from the system menu to make the settings See Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu P 207 Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu 1 Click start Printers and Faxes or Printers 2 Select the printer and then display the printer properties dialog b...

Page 226: ...also an extension of the printer driver See Device Settings Sheet P 241 Six sheets of print settings are displayed by the printer driver Main Page Setup Layout Favorites Utility and Support Windows Software Printer Driver Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu iPF8300 4 208 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 227: ...choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the particular printing ap plication or switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired Common Items AMedia Type Select the type of paper For information on the types of paper the printer supports refer to the Paper Reference Guide See Types of Pa per P 768 BGet Information Displays Paper Information on Printer...

Page 228: ...g P 178 MStatus Monitor Starts imagePROGRAF Status Monitor You can check the printer status job status and other conditions You can also set up email notification if printer errors occur by completing the Email Notice settings For details refer to the Status Monitor help file NAbout Displays version information for the printer driver SDefaults Restores all settings on the sheet to the default valu...

Page 229: ...an view and change the order of Print Target setting values View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application P 215 Configuration using Advanced Settings EPrint Priority Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing P 51 FPrint Quality Choose the level of print quality Giving Priority to Particular Gra...

Page 230: ...lable HColor Settings Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color settings Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver P 42 IThicken Fine Lines Activate this option to print fine lines more distinctly JUnidirectional Printing Select this checkbox to prevent problems such as misaligned lines and improve the print quality However the printing speed becomes slower KHigh Preci...

Page 231: ...Sheet P 209 APaper Source Shows the paper source supported by the printer as well as information about the loaded paper To update the paper source and media type settings in the printer driver select the desired Paper Source option and click OK Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box The Paper Detailed Settings dialog box offers the following settings For details on settings items refer to the printer ...

Page 232: ...length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held firmly against the Platen ENear End Margin Specify the length of the Near End Margin the leading edge margin of the roll as needed FCut Speed Select the speed of automatic cutting as needed You can adjust this setting if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used HCalibration Value You can...

Page 233: ...options settings items for the printing application BName Identifies the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon CDetails Here you can confirm detailed settings values for each listed item for the selected Print Target Color Adjustment Sheet Color If the color tone as printed is not as you expected you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment sheet Windows Software Printer Driver iPF830...

Page 234: ...djust the color tone of grays as desired Choose Cool Black tinged with blue or Warm Black tinged with red HBrightness Adjust the overall image brightness as desired You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image that is the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer screen IContrast Adjust the contrast o...

Page 235: ... Object Adjustment dialog box Color In the Object Adjustment dialog box you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to If an original comprises images graphics and text you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to Note To display the Object Adjustment dialog box click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet AImage Select this option to apply color adjust...

Page 236: ...are available when you select Driver Matching Mode in the AMatching Mode list AMatching Mode Select the color matching mode to use as desired Normally select Driver Matching Mode For color matching based on ICC profiles select ICC Matching Mode Driver ICM Mode or Host ICM Mode depending on your color matching system BMatching Method Select the color matching method that suits the document to be pr...

Page 237: ...ing options are available when you select ICC Matching Mode Driver ICM Mode or Host ICM Mode in the AMatching Mode list AMatching Mode Select the color matching mode to use as desired BInput Profile Settings You can select Image Graphics or Text You can choose Matching Method and Input Profile Various options are available depending on your selected Matching Mode To apply the same input profile au...

Page 238: ... colorimeter BPrint Chart Click to start the Light Source Check Tool for printing Chart The Light Source Check Tool must be installed to use this function Light Source Check Tool P 222 CChart Number In Chart select the number of the pattern with your desired colors DColor Temperature Enter the DColor Temperature measured during monitor calibration Displayed when the AMatching Method is set to Moni...

Page 239: ...meter DColor Temperature Enter the Color Temperature measured using the i1 colorimeter EIlluminance Enter the Illuminance measured using the i1 colorimeter Displayed when the AMatching Method is set to Monitor Matching on the Matching sheet Note For details on settings items see Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver P 42 Windows Software Printer Driver iPF8300 Ambient Light Adjust dialog box 4...

Page 240: ...f paper compatible with Driver Matching Mode refer to the Paper Reference Guide See Types of Paper P 768 CPaper Source Choose the paper source as desired Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in BMedia Type in the Main sheet DPrint Click to print the Chart Windows Software Printer Driver Light Source Check Tool iPF8300 4 222 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 241: ...this checkbox to display the color pattern CApply to Sample Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image DCyan EMagenta FYellow Not available GGray Tone Not available HBrightness Adjust the overall image brightness as desired You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image that is the original photo that was scanned or th...

Page 242: ...s see Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver P 42 Object Adjustment dialog box Monochrome In the Object Adjustment dialog box you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to If an original comprises images graphics and text you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to Note To display the Object Adjustment dialog box click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustm...

Page 243: ...t Monochrome Photo by Col or Mode in Advanced Settings and then click Color Settings Monochrome Photo is not available for all types of paper ASample Type The image at left is updated to reflect any changes you make to setting items on the sheet enabling you to check the results of adjustment BSample List Select a sample image as desired CColor Balance Click the list to select a color balance that...

Page 244: ... is lighter or darker than the original image that is the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer screen GContrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other as desired Increasing the GContrast makes images sharper and reducing the GContrast softens images HHighlight Adjust the brightness of the lightest portion ISh...

Page 245: ...inting Borderless printing is available if roll paper is selected in the LPaper Source list Choose from the following options when this setting is activated Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size P 95 Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width P 102 Borderless Printing at Actual Size P 88 DFit Paper Size Scales the document image to match the paper size Windows Softwa...

Page 246: ...rom the following options when this setting is activated Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size P 61 Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width P 67 Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value P 73 DFit Paper Size Scales the document image to match the paper size EFit Roll Paper Width Scales the document image to match the roll width FScaling Resizes the document image based on a specified sc...

Page 247: ...c Cutting you can specify Yes or No and Print Cut Guideline Cutting Roll Paper After Printing P 190 Select BBanner Printing when printing multiple pages continuously Printing Multiple Pages Continuously P 133 POutput Method Click to display the Output Method dialog box which enables you to complete the Output Method and Name of data to be saved settings Output Method dialog box P 230 OSize Options...

Page 248: ...e destination personal box in the Mail box list If Print after reception is complete is checked the print job is first saved completely on the printer hard disk before print ing begins These can be selected as Print options BName of data to be saved To use the file name choose Use file name Otherwise choose Enter name and enter a name in Name CMail box Displays a list of mail boxes If you choose S...

Page 249: ...eleted in the following situations If a standard paper size of the printer driver is selected If an oversized paper size is selected If a paper size marked with a red circle is selected CCustom Paper Size Name You can name Custom Paper Size as desired DUnits Specify the desired unit of measure for the Custom Paper Size height and width EPaper Size Specify the desired Width and Height You can make ...

Page 250: ...etting to select a particular page layout Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet P 138 Printing Posters in Sections P 145 Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other P 128 Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals P 175 BSet Click to display one of the following dialog boxes depending on the selection in APage Layout In these dialog boxes you can specify layout details and which pages to print as well...

Page 251: ...xt image skipping blank areas above and below printable data in documents which ena bles you to conserve the paper Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins P 167 HCopies Enter the number of copies to print in a range of 1 999 Reverse Order Activate this option to print pages in reverse order IPage Options Click to display the Page Options dialog box which enables ...

Page 252: ...ed as desired To print the time as well select BPrint Time Also CPrint User Name Select where the user name is printed as desired DPrint Page Number Select where the page number is printed as desired EFormat Settings Click to display the Format Settings dialog box which enables you to complete format related settings Windows Software Printer Driver Page Options Dialog Box iPF8300 4 234 Downloaded ...

Page 253: ...y choose Auto If documents are not printed correctly on large for mat paper it may help to select Yes and if fine lines are not visible or if images are distorted when printed it may help to select No BApplication Color Matching Priority You can give applications priority in color management CEnable Preview Switching When this option is selected PageComposer starts if you print with Open Preview W...

Page 254: ...e DApply Favorite Click to change the current print settings to those of the favorite selected in the AFavorites EApplication Settings Priority Activate this setting to use settings values specified in the source application in preference to favorite settings selected in the AFavorites when clicking DApply Favorite For details on the settings items used in preference refer to the printer driv er h...

Page 255: ...port Click to display the Open dialog box which enables you to import favorite settings saved as a file JExport Click to display the Save As dialog box which enables you to save the favorite settings as a file KUp Click to move the selected favorite up in the AFavorites list LDown Click to move the selected favorite down in the AFavorites list Windows Software Printer Driver iPF8300 Favorites Shee...

Page 256: ...ng Head alignment adjustment Feed amount adjustment BColor imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Click to launch Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iR enlargement copy which enables you to create hot folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy and assign print settings to hot folders Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER P 297 For details see Color imageRUNNER Enlargem...

Page 257: ...inter driver updates and browse other information BUser Manual Click to view the printer user s manual This function requires the user s manual to be installed on your computer CSettings Summaries Click to display the View Settings dialog box which enables you to confirm the settings for the Main Page Setup Lay out and Favorites sheets Windows Software Printer Driver iPF8300 Support Sheet 4 239 Do...

Page 258: ...e Setup Layout and Favorites sheets ACopy Click to copy the settings information to the clipboard You can paste the settings information into a file created with a text editor or similar application Windows Software Printer Driver Settings Summaries Dialog Box iPF8300 4 240 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 259: ... Settings sheet is for configuring the printer and it is an extension of the printer driver The following settings are available on the Device Settings sheet AAbout You can display version information for the printer driver Windows Software Printer Driver iPF8300 Device Settings Sheet 4 241 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 260: ...een and you can print the preview screen as it is seen Note The media type image size detailed media settings and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ from the Preview settings Operating Environment You can use the Preview in the following environments Compatible Operating System Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows 7 Sof...

Page 261: ...to save the settings Note Your printer is depicted in the lower left area of this screen 4 On the Print dialog box in the apllication software click the Print button 5 Preview main window is displayed Windows Software Preview iPF8300 Starting Preview 4 243 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 262: ...tus bar Note You can use the View menu to show or hide the tool bar Menu Bar This allows you to select menus required for operations Tool Bar This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations Windows Software Preview Preview Main Window iPF8300 4 244 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 263: ...check the settings you made in this area Dialog Area This allows you to set the print conditions and perform a print job Windows Software Preview iPF8300 Preview Main Window 4 245 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 264: ... information about Dialog Area see Dialog Area P 247 Status Bar This shows the message Pages and Output Size Windows Software Preview Preview Main Window iPF8300 4 246 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 265: ... For more information about Layout Selection see Printing with Selecting the Layout P 251 Center Originals Across Roll You can print on the center of the media loaded in the printer For more information about Center Originals Across Roll see Print on the Center P 253 Note Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source Windows Software Preview iPF8300 Dialog Area 4 247 Downloaded from Manuals...

Page 266: ...ecting to the printer Status Monitor Button Click the button to start Status Monitor Enlarge Reduce the screen display You can enlarge or reduce the screen display when you select Zoom from the View menu Setting Details Fit Screen Display all Fit to Width Display to the width of the paper Reduce Display at half of the standard size Standard Display at the standard size Enlarge Display with the dou...

Page 267: ...he ruler unit when you select Units from the View menu Setting Details mm Use mm as the ruler unit inch Use inches as the ruler unit Priority setting for rotating 90 degrees You can select Rotate 90 Degrees If Possible or Use Driver Settings from the Options menu Setting Details Rotate 90 Degrees If Possible Rotates pages in portrait orientation 90 degrees before printing Pages are only ro tated i...

Page 268: ... or Placing a checkmark for Rotate Page 90 degrees Conserve Paper on the printer driver Selecting Use Driver Settings Windows Software Preview Priority setting for rotating 90 degrees iPF8300 4 250 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 269: ... 1 In Layout Selection click the layout button to use Button Details Upper Button Turn at the position of Right Button Turn at the position of Left Button Turn at the position of Windows Software Preview iPF8300 Printing with Selecting the Layout 4 251 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 270: ... paper by printing in landscape orientation on roll paper You can select only Upper Button or Lower Button if Cut Sheet is selected Button Details The button is selected currently The button can be selected The button can not be selected 2 Click the Print Button Printing on the selected layout begins Windows Software Preview Printing with Selecting the Layout iPF8300 4 252 Downloaded from ManualsP...

Page 271: ...printer 1 Click the Center Originals Across Roll check box on 2 Click the Print button Printing on the center begins Note Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source Windows Software Preview iPF8300 Print on the Center 4 253 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 272: ...he print data contains spaces at the top or bottom 1 Click the No Spaces at Top or Bottom check box on 2 Click the Print button Printing on the settings with no spaces at top or bottom begins Windows Software Preview Not Print Spaces at the Top Bottom iPF8300 4 254 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 273: ...or Cut Object 279 Folded Duplex Window 280 Finished Size Settings Dialog Box 281 Binding Settings Dialog Box 282 Prints using Folded Duplex 283 The Features of Free Layout The main features of Free Layout are as follows Allows you to lay out at will and print a document created with application software You can not only lay out multiple pages on one page but also lay out and print a multiple file ...

Page 274: ... that requires installation imagePROGRAF Printer Driver Note This function is not available on 64 bit version of Windows Starting Free Layout Follow the procedure below to start the Free Layout 1 Start the apllication software which you use 2 From the application software s File menu select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box Note Normally select Print from the File menu 3 From the...

Page 275: ...from the list Click the OK button to save the settings Note When you select Free Layout all other setting items will be disabled 5 On the Print dialog box in the apllication software click the Print button Free Layout main window is displayed Windows Software Free Layout iPF8300 Starting Free Layout 4 257 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 276: ... You can use the View menu to show or hide the tool and status bar Menu Bar This allows you to select menus required for operations Tool Bar This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations Windows Software Free Layout Free Layout Main Window iPF8300 4 258 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 277: ...out objects and edit the object size and orientation Status Bar This shows the paper size unit of length and number of objects Windows Software Free Layout iPF8300 Free Layout Main Window 4 259 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 278: ... loaded in the printer Refer to Printer Driver P 196 for details on the printer driver Note When you select the Detailed Settings the only three sheets displayed are the Main sheet the Page Setup sheet and the Layout sheet Some of the printer driver settings may be disabled Windows Software Free Layout Detailed Settings iPF8300 4 260 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 279: ...m between 0 39 and 7 88 inch You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Divisions You can change the number of divisions of grid lines so that they serve as a guide to laying out objects Note You can input between 1 and 10 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Grid Color Select the grid line color Auto Arrange Spacing Change the object to object spacing...

Page 280: ...Line You can print the dotted line as the frame style Dashed Line You can print the dashed line as the frame style Crop Marks You can print with the crop marks Page Options Dialog Box This dialog box appears when you select Page Options from the File menu This allows you to configure the roll paper length object layout order and margins of Free Layout Roll Paper Length Set the length of one page t...

Page 281: ...objects are laid out from upper right to left Lower Left to Top The objects are laid out from lower left to top Note When you have selected Roll Paper Length Auto Settings and Paper Orientation Vertical you can choose Upper Left to Right or Upper Right to Left When you have selected Roll Paper Length Auto Settings and Paper Orientation Horizontal you can choose Upper Left to Bottom or Lower Left t...

Page 282: ...ject Note When the objects are not selected you can not select Format Rotate When you place a checkmark here you can select Rotate Right or Rotate Left Setting Details Rotate Right Rotates the object 90 degrees clockwise Rotate Left Rotates the object 90 degrees counterclockwise Note When several objects are selected you cannot select Rotate Windows Software Free Layout Format Dialog Box iPF8300 4...

Page 283: ...ll of the objects at the specified photo size Note You can input between 25 and 600 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Position Sheet You can rotate enlarge or reduce an object Note When the objects are not selected you can not select Format Object Position You can move the object position by changing the values Setting Details Vertical Pos You can input the number of t...

Page 284: ...ple File Document on One Page You can lay out and print a multiple file document on one page 1 From the application software s File menu select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box Note Normally select Print from the File menu 2 Click Properties to open the Properties dialog box Windows Software Free Layout Laying out a Multiple File Document on One Page iPF8300 4 266 Downloaded fro...

Page 285: ...icted in the lower left area of this screen 4 In the Layout sheet click on the Page Layout check box and select Free Layout from the list Windows Software Free Layout iPF8300 Laying out a Multiple File Document on One Page 4 267 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 286: ... save the settings 6 In the Print dialog box select the pages to print and the number of copies and click the OK button Free Layout starts laying out the document created with application software in the layout area as an object Windows Software Free Layout Laying out a Multiple File Document on One Page iPF8300 4 268 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 287: ...created with multiple application programs on one page 1 From the application software s File menu select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box Note Normally select Print from the File menu 2 Click Properties to open the Properties dialog box Windows Software Free Layout iPF8300 Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page 4 269 Downloaded from Manuals...

Page 288: ...ower left area of this screen 4 In the Layout sheet click on the Page Layout check box and select Free Layout from the list Windows Software Free Layout Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page iPF8300 4 270 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 289: ...ings 6 In the Print dialog box select the pages to print and the number of copies and click the OK button Free Layout starts laying out the document created with application software in the layout area as an object Windows Software Free Layout iPF8300 Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page 4 271 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 290: ... click that object To select multiple successive objects click them while holding down the Shift key To select multiple arbitrary objects click them while holding down the Ctrl key To select all objects select Select All from the Edit menu When you specify the area with dragging the mouse the object in the area is selected Windows Software Free Layout Selecting an Object iPF8300 4 272 Downloaded f...

Page 291: ...how the arrow handle and drag this handle to change the object size Resizing by specifying a scaling value 1 Select an object Click on the Enl Red checkbox in the Format Dialog Box P 264 and select Scaling 2 You either enter numbers directly Note You can input between 25 and 600 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button 3 Click the OK button Moving an Object You can move the o...

Page 292: ...e Pos in the Format Dialog Box P 264 Rotating an Object You can rotate the object 1 Select an object 2 Select Rotate Left 90 Degrees or Rotate Right 90 Degrees from the toolbar Alternatively you may click on the Rotate check box in the Format Dialog Box P 264 then select Rotate Right or Rotate Left and click the OK button Windows Software Free Layout Rotating an Object iPF8300 4 274 Downloaded fro...

Page 293: ...n the Order setting in the Page Options Dialog Box P 262 dialog box Aligning Objects You can align objects systematically 1 Select multiple objects 2 Click the align button from the toolbar Alternatively you may select the align menu from the Object menu Align Top Lays out the objects justifying them to the top Windows Software Free Layout iPF8300 Laying out Objects Automatically 4 275 Downloaded ...

Page 294: ...hem to the vertical center Align Bottom Lays out the objects justifying them to the bottom Align Left Lays out the objects justifying them to the left Windows Software Free Layout Aligning Objects iPF8300 4 276 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 295: ...change the object overlapping order 1 Select an object 2 Select the Overlapping Order menu from the Object menu Note The order of overlapping affects the order of objects automatically laid out You can also select by clicking the right button of the mouse on an object Windows Software Free Layout iPF8300 Changing the Object Overlapping Order 4 277 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 296: ...st position Send to Back Moves the object to the backmost position Bring Forward Moves the object one position to the front Windows Software Free Layout Changing the Object Overlapping Order iPF8300 4 278 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 297: ... from the Edit menu Note The copied or cut object is laid out at the end of the page You can also select by clicking the right button of the mouse on an object In order to paste an object on any position that you like you can paste the object with Pointed Paste by clicking the right button of the mouse on any position that you want Windows Software Free Layout iPF8300 Pasting a Copied or Cut Objec...

Page 298: ... window consists of the menu and tool bars layout area and status bar Note The toolbar and status bar can be toggled between hidden and displayed from the View menu Menu Bar This allows you to select menus required for operations Tool Bar This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations Windows Software Free Layout Folded Duplex Window iPF8300 4 280 Downloaded from ManualsPrint...

Page 299: ...inished Size Settings Dialog Box This dialog box is displayed when you select Finished Size Settings from the Edit menu This allows you to configure finished size settings Finished Size Selects the method for setting the finished size Windows Software Free Layout iPF8300 Finished Size Settings Dialog Box 4 281 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 300: ...ed if they will not fit within the roll paper width Binding Settings Dialog Box This is displayed when you select Binding Settings from the Edit menu This allows you to configure the binding edge settings Binding Edge Configures the binding edge when folding paper The following settings are available for the binding edge Setting Details Bottom Prints by placing the binding margin gutter at the bot...

Page 301: ... using Folded Duplex Allows you to produce duplex printing by combining two pages and folding them 1 Select two objects from the layout area of Free Layout 2 Select Folded Duplex from the Edit menu of Free Layout Open the Folded Duplex window and arrange the selected objects in the layout area 3 Open the Finished Size Settings dialog box from the Edit menu 4 Select Fit Roll Paper Width or Specify ...

Page 302: ... and Edges checkbox is selected fold lines are only printed at the three locations of the center and both edges 10 Click OK to save the settings 11 Confirm the print setting and begin printing Windows Software Free Layout Prints using Folded Duplex iPF8300 4 284 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 303: ...ugh the printer driver Note The media type image size detailed media settings and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ from the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy settings Operating Environment You can use the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy in the following environments Compatible Operating System Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows Ser...

Page 304: ...rgement Copy dialog box displays Note If you click on the Add to Startup folder check box in the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box the icon of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility will appear on the task bar when starting Windows thereafter Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iPF8300 4 286 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter ...

Page 305: ...R Enlargement Copy Dialog Box The explanation below is on the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box Note For the step to open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box see Starting Color image RUNNER Enlargement Copy P 285 Hot Folder The hot folder list appears Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iPF8300 Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box 4 287 Downloaded...

Page 306: ...n in the Windows startup menu Save Printed Data Automatically saves printed data About Button Click the button to display the name and the version number of the utility Operation Guide Button Click the button to display the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual Hot Folder Hot folder refers to a folder used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy When transferred to the PC s hot folder the...

Page 307: ... the step to open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box see Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy P 285 2 The Easy Setup Wizard dialog box displays Click the Next button Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iPF8300 Creating a New Hot Folder 4 289 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 308: ...Note If the Borderless Printing checkbox is checked only media types that can be used for borderless printing are displayed in the list Click the Next button Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Creating a New Hot Folder iPF8300 4 290 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 309: ...nned with the Color imageRUNNER you need to share a folder Enter the folder shared name in Shared Name Click the Next button Note This shared name is used as the name of the hot folder You cannot use the Back button after clicking the Next button here Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iPF8300 Creating a New Hot Folder 4 291 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 310: ...8 Click Finish button to close the Easy Setup Wizard dialog box Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Creating a New Hot Folder iPF8300 4 292 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 311: ...specify as a hot folder 2 Open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box and then click the Add button Note For the step to open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box see Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy P 285 Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iPF8300 Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder 4 293 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manua...

Page 312: ...dialog box displays Enter the hot folder name in Name Click the Browse botton with selecting Specify a folder to set the existing shared folder Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder iPF8300 4 294 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 313: ...ecessary set the print conditions in the hot folder See Setting the Print Parameters P 296 Click the OK button to close the Add Edit Hot Folder dialog box Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iPF8300 Specifying an Existing Shared Folder as a Hot Folder 4 295 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 314: ...printer driver is used to configure basic settings to match the type of media loaded in the printer Refer to Printer Driver P 196 for details on the printer driver Note The only three sheets displayed are the Main sheet the Page Setup sheet and the Layout sheet Some of the printer driver settings may be disabled Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setting the Print Parameters iPF83...

Page 315: ...folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER and complete the settings for enlargement copy 2 Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER Configure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder After these settings are complete you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER Registering a hot folder o...

Page 316: ...ons on assigning scanning settings and destinations to a Favorites button refer to the setting manual displayed by clicking Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual button of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility or refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual Scanning the original and print an enlargement Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printi...

Page 317: ...h panel display Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the conditions you specified for the folder Windows Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iPF8300 Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER 4 299 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 318: ...ors while Checking the Preview for Color 335 Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome 336 Adjust the Colors by Color Matching 340 Print High Quality Adobe RGB16bit Images 341 Prints monochrome photographs with high quality 343 Using Adobe CMM 343 Perform Black Point Compensation 345 Perform Printing Press Simulation Print 346 Enlarge Reduce and Print 347 Enlarge Reduce and Print...

Page 319: ...rint Plug In settings the arrangement of the image in the layout preview the print start position and the media size Loss of gradation in dark areas can be reduced by performing black point compensation Note Adobe CMM is required in order to use the black point compensation function You can perform printing press simulation printing by specifying the printing press profile Operating Environment Th...

Page 320: ...he installer screen does not appear open the CD ROM icon in My Computer and click on set up exe to open the icon 2 Click imagePROGRAF Print Plug in button 3 Click the appropriate Install button for your Print Plug In Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Installation Procedures iPF8300 4 302 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 321: ...appear In this case refer to the Photoshop manual then specify a folder for the Plug In The Print Plug In cannot be installed in Photoshop until after Photoshop has been installed and then opened at least once on a PC Install the Print Plug In after installing opening and quitting Photo shop 4 Click Next button 5 After you have read the Licensing Agreement select I accept the terms of the license ...

Page 322: ...edures for uninstalling the Print Plug In are as follows Uninstall the Print Plug In for Photoshop 1 Select start in Control Panel menu 2 Open Add or Remove Programs Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Uninstall Procedures iPF8300 4 304 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 323: ...mage that you wish to print 3 If required select the print range Note Images for use with Print Plug In are less than 60 000 pixels in width and height Reduce the selec tion range or reduce the image with processing for images more than 60 000 pixels in width and height and then attempt step 3 4 Select Export or Data Export from the File menu and then select the output plug in that matches your pr...

Page 324: ...ICCv4 Adobe CMM is required If Adobe CMM has not been installed a message is displayed and the source profile is changed to Adobe RGB If you want to use an ICCv4 profile close the plug in and then install Adobe CMM Refer to Using Adobe CMM P 343 for details on how to install Adobe CMM Starting from Digital Photo Professional Follow the procedure below to start the Print Plug In from Digital Photo ...

Page 325: ...age source profile is ICCv4 Adobe CMM is required If Adobe CMM has not been installed a message is displayed and the source profile is changed to Adobe RGB If you want to use an ICCv4 profile close the plug in and then install Adobe CMM Refer to Using Adobe CMM P 343 for details on how to install Adobe CMM Print Plug In Main Window The Print Plug In main window consists of the sheet selection area...

Page 326: ... on each sheet are as follows Main Sheet P 311 Page Setup Sheet P 315 Color Settings Sheet P 318 Print History Sheet P 319 Support Sheet P 321 Preview Area You can check the settings you made on the image in this area Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Print Plug In Main Window iPF8300 4 308 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 327: ...this button to begin printing QuitButton Click this button to close the Print Plug In window and return to application software HelpButton Click this button to display the Print Plug In Help file Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Print Plug In Main Window 4 309 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 328: ...the print range when you drag the image while the cursor is dis played as When you click the image while the cursor is displayed as the selected area is deselected Roll Paper Preview Display the media size and roll paper information on the top in the layout printing on roll paper To select Roll Paper Preview select Roll Paper in Paper Source Print Selected Range Place a checkmark here to only prin...

Page 329: ... it is not compat ible with the printer or media that you are using the color balance of the actual print product will differ Image Properties button When you click the button to open the Image Properties dialog box where Image Size Resolution Bit and Color Space information of the image imported to Print Plug In are displayed Click the Close button to return to Print Plug In Main Sheet You can us...

Page 330: ...etting Details Accuracy 300ppi This processes images at an accurate resolution This can control print speed and memory capacity High Accuracy 600ppi This processes images at a more accurate resolution This setting results in the best print quality but this takes more time to print than Accuracy 300ppi while also requiring more memory capacity This may not be displayed depending on how you set Medi...

Page 331: ...timum color conversion from the input image data color space in formation sRGB Adobe RGB media settings etc You should normally select these settings Auto Monochrome Photo Performs the best color conversion to monochrome from the input image data col or space information sRGB Adobe RGB media settings etc None No Color Correction You cannot perform color conversion with a plug in This is useful for...

Page 332: ...CC Conversion Options button This is displayed when an ICC profile is selected as the Output Profile When this button is clicked the ICC Conversion Options dialog box is displayed allowing you to configure color conver sion related settings Refer to ICC Conversion Options dialog box P 325 for details on ICC Conversion Options Copies You can input the number of print copies in numerical characters ...

Page 333: ... reduction The image size sent to the printer is displayed matching the selected method in Output Image Size The following settings are available for enlarged reduced printing Setting Details Fit Paper Size This automatically enlarges reduces the entire image imported to Print Plug In to match the export media size when printing Fit Roll Paper Width This automatically enlarges reduces the entire i...

Page 334: ...creen Landscape Prints the image on the media rotated 90 degrees Layout You can select the print position of an image on the media The following settings are available for layout Layout Setting Details Upper Left of Output Paper Size Prints the image with fitting the top left of the active print area for Paper Size Center of Output Paper Size Prints the center of the image on the center of the sel...

Page 335: ...heet Select to print on the cut sheet Roll Paper Options button Click this button to open the Roll Paper Options dialog box where you can set roll paper width and perform auto cut settings For more information about the roll paper options see Roll Paper Options Dialog Box P 326 Size Options Click the Size Options button to open the Size Options dialog box and you can select a media name size and o...

Page 336: ... either inputting a numerical value or dragging the slide bar Note You can check the adjustments in the preview display Brightness You can adjust the brightness of the printed image without losing the brightest and darkest areas by either inputting a nu merical value or dragging the slide bar Note You can check the adjustments in the preview display Contrast You can relatively adjust the brightnes...

Page 337: ...button Click the button to return all of the settings on the Color Settings sheet to their defaults Print History Sheet You can use this sheet to apply settings history used in printing and to print information such as the image file name with the image Print History and Favorites This displays a list of print preferences Select Restore Defaults and click the Apply button to restore all settings t...

Page 338: ...ts the information print position Top Header Information is printed on the top of the image Bottom Footer Information is printed on the bottom of the image Print History Number Place a checkmark here to print the print history number File Name Place a checkmark here to print the file name Printed at Place a checkmark here to print the time and date Color Adjustment Value Place a checkmark here to ...

Page 339: ...button Click the button to display the printer manuals installed on the computer Note You must have User Manual installed on your computer About button Click the button to open the version information window of the Print Plug In Click the OK button in the version informa tion window to return to the Print Plug In window Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF830...

Page 340: ... line scans during printing Setting Details Printer Default The settings of the printer operating panel are applied None The printing continues to the next line immediately after the last line 1sec 3sec 5sec 7sec 9sec The printing continues to the next line after the set time For the media type that has problems such as ink smears on the page or colors that seem uneven during borderless printing e...

Page 341: ...settings of the printer operating panel are applied Use Value The calibration results are used for printing Disregard Value The calibration results are not used for printing Select this option to avoid changes to image color tones during printing due to color calibration Mirror Specify whether to print a mirror image as needed Select this option to print a version of the document or image with the...

Page 342: ... enlargement Bilinear Performs line vector enlargement Bicubic Adjust pixels with calculation of elements such as a color or brightness of neigh boring pixels Close Plug in After Printing When you place a checkmark here the plug in closes after printing finishes Note If printing does not finish correctly because it was canceled or an error occurred the plug in does not close Output Method You can ...

Page 343: ...lected in the Output Profile list in the Main sheet and the ICC Conversion Options button is clicked This allows you to configure detailed color matching related settings Conversion Engine Selects the conversion engine to use when converting colors Note Adobe CMM needs to be installed in order to use Adobe CMM Refer to Using Adobe CMM P 343 for details on how to install Adobe CMM Black Point Compe...

Page 344: ...idth This selects the width of the roll media set to the printer Automatic Cutting You can set the printer to cut roll paper automatically or print a guideline for cutting The following settings are available for automatic cutting Setting Details Available Each page is automatically cut after it is printed None Each page is not cut after it is printed and printing continues without interruption Pr...

Page 345: ...t the units of measure to use when you define custom media size Switching this setting resets the units of measure for the entire Plug In Paper Size Width Enter the width of the media size Height Enter the height of the media size Note You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Add button Click the button to register the contents of the settings Windows Software Print Plug In f...

Page 346: ...t Enter an input value Note The allowed entry range is 0 to 255 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Output Enter an output value Note The allowed entry range is 0 to 255 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Load Curves button Click the button to load stored data for a tone curve Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professi...

Page 347: ...er Displays the print history number File Name Displays image file name Printed at Displays time and date of printing Comment Displays comment details Note Up to 200 print history items can be displayed All items above 200 are deleted When you cannot print properly because you canceled the printing or an error occurred appears to the left of the print history number Delete button Click the button ...

Page 348: ...ttings Displays the print history settings selected from the Print History or Favorites Setting Details Main When you select this the Main sheet settings are displayed Page Setup When you select this the Page Setup sheet settings are displayed Color Settings When you select this the Color Settings sheet settings are displayed Utilize Three Types of Previews You can use Print Plug In to check an im...

Page 349: ...print position by dragging the image When the cursor is displayed as on the preview the below conditions on the Page Setup sheet have all been met There is no checkmark in Borderless Printing There is no checkmark in Enlarged Reduced Printing or Scaling has been selected Center of Roll Paper has not been selected in Layout Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF...

Page 350: ... Image in the Preview area the Selected Range feature is enabled and you an drag the cursor on the image and select an area for print ing When you click the image while the cursor is displayed as on the preview the selected area is deselec ted Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Check the original image with Image iPF8300 4 332 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com...

Page 351: ...eview in Preview Note To select Roll Paper Preview in Preview select Roll Paper in Paper Source Print with a Desired Picture Quality You can specify and print at the resolution you desire 1 Display the Main sheet Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Check Image with Roll Paper Preview 4 333 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 352: ... in Note When you select High Gradation 8bit images are processed at 8 bit channel 24 bit When you select Highest Gradation 16bit images are processed at 16bit channel 48 bit Highest Gradation 16bit will not display with some Media Type or Input Resolution to Plug in settings 5 Select the mode to be printed when processing images in Print Mode Note The settings that can be selected differ by Media...

Page 353: ...ation Warm Black for Gray Tone Enhance brightness for the curves The above image adjustments are reflected in the before and after images below Before Application After Application 1 Display the Color Settings sheet 2 Drag the slide bar in the direction of Low in Cyan Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Co...

Page 354: ...he Print button The adjustments are reflected in the image and printing begins Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome You can adjust the colors while checking the adjustments in the preview The following explanation is about the procedures for adjusting example image below Low for Contrast Light for Highlight Light for Shadow Enhance brightness for the curves The unapplied and...

Page 355: ... Main sheet 2 Select Auto Monochrome Photo in Output Profile Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome 4 337 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 356: ...can change the numbers by inputting in numerical characters You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button 7 Click the Curves button then click near the center of the curve Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome iPF8300 4 338 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 357: ...ick the Print button This applies the image adjustments and starts the print job Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome 4 339 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 358: ...ile in Output Profile Note When you place a checkmark in Perform Proof in Preview you can check the color matching in the preview This may not be displayed depending on how you set Media Type The details of Output Profile you have set is saved even when you close the Print Plug In but when the specified profile cannot be located it is set to Auto Color If an ICC profile is selected as the Output P...

Page 359: ...ising the level of tone in the image 1 Select the Adobe RGB16bit image data in Photoshop and start Print Plug In See Starting from Photoshop P 305 2 Click button 3 Check that Adobe RGB is displayed in Color Space and 16bit channel is displayed in Bit in the Image Properties dialog box and click the Close button Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Print H...

Page 360: ...ode 8 If required adjust the colors using color matching Note For more information about the color matching see Adjust the Colors by Color Matching P 340 9 Click the Print button Printing of the Adobe RGB16bit image begins Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Print High Quality Adobe RGB16bit Images iPF8300 4 342 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 361: ...e most suitable monochrome and printing begins Using Adobe CMM Adobe CMM is a color conversion engine made by Adobe Using Adobe CMM makes it possible to obtain uniform color conversion results and to use the black point compensation function How to Obtain Adobe CMM Adobe CMM can be obtained using the following procedure 1 Open the Adobe website http www adobe com 2 Enter Adobe CMM in the search in...

Page 362: ...d OS Windows XP SP2 Windows Vista Supported CPU Intel Xeon Xeon Dual Intel Centrino Pentium 4 processor Note Check with Adobe for details How to Use Adobe CMM The procedure for using Adobe CMM is as follows 1 Display the Main sheet 2 Select one of the ICC profiles as the Output Profile 3 Click the ICC Conversion Options button Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional...

Page 363: ...using the following procedure Use this to avoid saturation in the black areas of images 1 Display the Main sheet 2 Select one of the ICC profiles as the Output Profile 3 Click the ICC Conversion Options button to open the ICC Conversion Options dialog box 4 Select Adobe CMM as the Conversion Engine Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Perform Black Point ...

Page 364: ... perform printing press simulation prints by specifying ICC profiles such as Japan Color or SWOP and specifying an ICC profile for the printing press 1 Display the Main sheet 2 Select one of the ICC profiles as the Output Profile 3 Check the Proof check box and select the profile for the printing press you want to target from the list on the right Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digit...

Page 365: ... Print Matching Width of Roll Paper P 349 Specify Scaling Enlarge Reduce and Print P 350 Enlarge Reduce and Print Matching Output Media Size By specifying the media type loaded in the printer the image can be enlarged or reduced to fit the size of the image area of the media This feature is useful when you need to print on the full width of Media that you have selected Note When you need to print ...

Page 366: ...u select Portrait the image on the media prints as it appears on the screen When you select Landscape the image on the media prints rotated 90 degrees 4 Click the Enlarged Reduced Printing check box on Note This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing 5 Select Fit Paper Size 6 Click the Print button The image prints filling the entire output media surface Windows Softwar...

Page 367: ... OK button Note For more information about the Roll Paper Options dialog box see Roll Paper Options Dialog Box P 326 Click the Defaults button to return all of the roll paper option settings to their defaults 5 Select either Portrait or Landscape as the media orientation for the image in Orientation Note This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing 6 Select Fit Roll Pape...

Page 368: ...the image on the media prints as it appears on the screen When you select Landscape the image on the media prints rotated 90 degrees 4 Click the Enlarged Reduced Printing check box on Note This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing 5 Select Scaling and input the scaling factor or drag the four corners of the image in the Preview display Note You can specify scaling rat...

Page 369: ...e performed only between two edges To use the borderless printing function the specified media must be set to the printer 1 Display the Page Setup sheet 2 Select Roll Paper in Paper Source 3 Click the Borderless Printing check box on Note Select the width for roll paper set in the printer in Roll Paper Width in the Specify Roll Paper Width dialog box and click OK Windows Software Print Plug In for...

Page 370: ...per Detailed Settings Dialog Box P 322 and click the OK button Utilize Print History When you perform various settings and print in Print Plug In those settings are saved as print history Also you can export and import as files You can store often used print history under a specified name in print preferences Note You can save up to 200 print history items All items over 200 are deleted in chronol...

Page 371: ...Information to Print with Image P 365 Confirm Print History Details You can confirm the print history details 1 Display Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button Note Select the print history you wish to check the details of from either Print History or Favorites in the Print History Details dialog box Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Confirm Pri...

Page 372: ...tory to an Image You can use previous print history and apply it to an image 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 If required check the print history details See Confirm Print History Details P 353 Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Apply Print History to an Image iPF8300 4 354 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 373: ... can you store the print history stored under a different name in print preferences you can also find it with ease Note You can store up to 200 print history items to print preferences 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Store Print History to Print Preferences 4 355 Downloaded from ManualsPrin...

Page 374: ...x and check the print history details in Settings 4 Select the print history you wish to store in print preferences from Print History and click the button Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Store Print History to Print Preferences iPF8300 4 356 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 375: ...Click the OK button to close the Print History Details dialog box Delete Print History You can delete print history Important Be aware that you cannot undo deletions of print history Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Delete Print History 4 357 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 376: ...he print history you wish to delete from Print History in the Print History Details dialog box and click the Delete button Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Delete Print History iPF8300 4 358 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 377: ...ton 5 Click the OKbutton to close the Print History Details dialog box Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Delete Print History 4 359 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 378: ...ry sheet 2 Click the Details button 3 Select the print history you wish to export from Favorites in the Print History Details dialog box and click the Export button Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Export Print History from Print Preferences iPF8300 4 360 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 379: ...ose the Print History Details dialog box Import Print History to Print Preferences You can import print history in file format and store it to print preferences 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Import Print History to Print Preferences 4 361 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 380: ...Note The print history file name suffix is pjb You cannot import a print history file exported from a different OS in Print Plug In You cannot import a print history file exported from a different printer in Print Plug In Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Import Print History to Print Preferences iPF8300 4 362 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 381: ...tory store to print preferences You cannot store more than 200 print history items in print preferen ces 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Delete Print History from Print Preferences 4 363 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 382: ...g box and click the Delete button 4 Click the OK button 5 Click the OK button to close the Print History Details dialog box Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Delete Print History from Print Preferences iPF8300 4 364 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 383: ...ement rates and print position values When Keep Media Size is set to On on the printer a portion of bottom of the print data is not printed 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Print Information check box on 3 Select the position where you wish to print the information in Information Print Position 4 Click the information check box you wish to print on 5 When you wish to edit the comment ...

Page 384: ... box and click OK button 7 Click the Print button Comments are printed with images Windows Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Set Information to Print with Image iPF8300 4 366 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 385: ...xcel 413 Configuring Binding Excel 416 Configuring Special Settings 418 Print Plug In for Office features Print Plug In for Office is a Plug In that enables easy printing from Microsoft Office It is displayed on the toolbar ribbon so it is easily accessible It can be set by just selecting from the Wizard Large Format Printing custom media size can also be set in the Wizard from Microsoft Word or M...

Page 386: ...ou are editing an embedded object or link object the software will not run correctly If you added the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In ribbon to the Microsoft Office 2007 Quick Access tool bar the software will not run correctly Steps to install Below are the steps to install Print Plug In for Office Note You must log into Windows as an Administrator before the installation 1 Insert User Software CD ROM...

Page 387: ...he Install Individual Software button 3 Click Install in imagePROGRAF Print Plug In for Office Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300 Steps to install 4 369 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 388: ...4 Click the Next button 5 Read the License Agreement and click the Yes button Windows Software Print Plug In for Office Steps to install iPF8300 4 370 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 389: ...on 7 Click the Yes button 8 Click the Exit button The installation for Print Plug In for Office is complete Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300 Steps to install 4 371 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 390: ...o the following topic for details on how to display the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In for Office toolbar ribbon When Print Plug In for Office is not displayed P 373 Steps to uninstall Below are the steps to uninstall Print Plug In for Office 1 If Microsoft Office is open close it 2 Select Control Panel from the start menu 3 Open Add or Remove Programs 4 Select imagePROGRAF Print Plug In and click the...

Page 391: ... to re install Print Plug In for Office to display the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In toolbar ribbon Note You cannot re install Print Plug In for Office once an Office application is running When the message ap pears select Cancel and close the active Office application Re install Print Plug In for Office as follows 1 Close Microsoft Office if it is open 2 Install Print Plug In for Office For informat...

Page 392: ...From the list on the left side of the application name options dialog box select Add ins 3 Select Disabled Items in the Manage combo box and click the Go button Windows Software Print Plug In for Office When Print Plug In for Office is not displayed iPF8300 4 374 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 393: ... the Enable button 5 Close all the dialog boxes and restart the Office application For Microsoft Office 2003 1 Click About application name in the Help menu of application Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300 When Print Plug In for Office is not displayed 4 375 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 394: ...alog box select it and click the Enable button 4 Close all the dialog boxes and restart the Office application To start from Microsoft Word Below are the steps to start Print Plug In for Office from Microsoft Word 1 Start Microsoft Word Windows Software Print Plug In for Office To start from Microsoft Word iPF8300 4 376 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 395: ...using the Special Settings dialog box Refer to Configuring Special Settings P 418 for details Printer list Select Printer If you select Show All Printers the imagePROGRAF printers will be displayed again Select this when you want to display all printer drivers or update the dis play Print Button The print Wizard is displayed The settings Print Matching Roll Width Borderless Printing Multi Page Pri...

Page 396: ...le the Printing Wizard is open close the Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar Large Format Printing Wizard dialog box Windows Software Print Plug In for Office To start from Microsoft Word iPF8300 4 378 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 397: ...bits and posters and also print Portrait and Landscape orienta tions made in Large Format Printing Wizard 1 Start Microsoft Word 2 If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug In is displayed click it 3 Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In toolbar ribbon The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed Important If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard i...

Page 398: ...h 5 Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer 6 Select image size 7 Select layout 8 Select Next Windows Software Print Plug In for Office Print Matching Roll Width Word iPF8300 4 380 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 399: ...iew button to display the preview screen You can check and make changes to the layout in the preview screen When you print to the edge of the roll width the maximum length will be the lesser of 5 587 times the roll paper width or 18 0m 12 Press Print to start printing Borderless Printing Word Prints up to the border of the media Photos and posters can be printed without worrying about margins 1 St...

Page 400: ...he display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open close the Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon 4 Click Borderless Printing Windows Software Print Plug In for Office Borderless Printing Word iPF8300 4 382 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 401: ... proceed and press OK Note To adjust the data select Return to application and press OK Exit Print Plug In for Office and return to the application 6 Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer 7 Select Layout Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300 Borderless Printing Word 4 383 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 402: ...ettings Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen You can confirm and make changes to the layout in the preview screen The maximum length for Borderless Printing is the lesser of 5 587 times the roll paper width or 18 0m 12 Press Print to start printing Multi Page Printing Word Prints multiple pages as one page You can print handouts into a single page or print matter with many ...

Page 403: ... displayed Important If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open close the Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300 Multi Page Printing Word 4 385 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 404: ...e Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer 6 Select layout from Layout Selection 7 Select Next 8 Select Media Type Windows Software Print Plug In for Office Multi Page Printing Word iPF8300 4 386 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 405: ...r of 5 587 times the roll paper width or 18 0m 11 Press Print to start printing Register the settings Word If you are going to print multiple times using the same setting you can select One Touch Registration Registered settings can be recalled from Print Using Registered Settings 1 Set up to the Print screen from Print Matching Roll Width Borderless Printing or Multi Page Printing of Printing Men...

Page 406: ...rint screen will not delete the registered settings Print Using Registered Settings Word Prints using the registered settings 1 Start Microsoft Word 2 If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug In is displayed click it 3 Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In toolbar ribbon The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed Windows Software Print Plug In for Office Print Using Registered Settings Word iPF...

Page 407: ...inting Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon 4 Click Print Using Registered Settings 5 Click the Next button 6 Select Media Type Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300 Print Using Registered Settings Word 4 389 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 408: ...ntation Page Sizes made in the Large Format Printing Wizard Create Page Size in Portrait or Landscape Orientation Use the Large Format Printing Wizard to create portrait page sizes for Potrait Orientation and landscape page sizes for Landscape Orientation 1 Start Microsoft Word 2 If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug In is displayed click it 3 Click Paper Settings from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In to...

Page 409: ...trait Page Size will be used as an example to explain the procedure 5 Adjust Length from the list box or slide bar 6 Click the Create Page button Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300 Portrait Orientation Landscape Orientation Word 4 391 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 410: ...Microsoft PowerPoint Below are the steps to start Print Plug In for Office from Microsoft PowerPoint 1 Start Microsoft PowerPoint 2 If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug In is displayed on the toolbar ribbon click it Important If the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In toolbar ribbon is not displayed refer to the following When Print Plug In for Office is not displayed P 373 3 Check that the imagePROGRAF Print ...

Page 411: ...rless Printing Multi Page Printing and Print Using Registered Settings can be set Paper Settings Button Large Format Wizard is displayed Settings for Portrait or Landscape Orientation can be set Printing Wizard dialog box Important If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open close the Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to...

Page 412: ...y the data again Note If you open a password protected document as read only the Large Format Printing Wizard cannot be run Remove the password protection Print Matching Roll Width PowerPoint Prints to the edge of the roll width You can print large exhibits and posters and also print Portrait and Landscape orienta tions made in Large Format Printing Wizard 1 Start Microsoft PowerPoint 2 If Start i...

Page 413: ...cation while the Printing Wizard is open close the Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon 4 Click Print Matching Roll Width 5 Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300 Print Matching Roll Width PowerPoint 4 395 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 414: ...o need print multiple times using the same setting Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen You can check and make changes to the layout in the preview screen When you print to the edge of the roll width the maximum print length is the lesser of 13 44 times the roll paper width for Microsoft PowerPoint 2000 or 14 22 times the roll paper width for Micro soft PowerPoint 2002 or l...

Page 415: ...he imagePROGRAF Print Plug In toolbar ribbon The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed Important If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open close the Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300 Borderless Printing PowerPoint 4 397...

Page 416: ...oose how to proceed and press OK Note To adjust the data select Return to application and press OK Exit Print Plug In for Office and return to the application 6 Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer 7 Select Layout Windows Software Print Plug In for Office Borderless Printing PowerPoint iPF8300 4 398 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 417: ...view screen You can confirm and make changes to the layout in the preview screen The maximum print length for Borderless Printing is the lesser of 13 44 times the roll paper width for Microsoft PowerPoint 2000 or 14 22 times the roll paper width for Microsoft PowerPoint 2002 or later or 18 0m 12 Press Print to start printing Multi Page Printing PowerPoint Prints multiple pages as one page You can ...

Page 418: ...splayed Important If you want to change the display to another file or application while the Printing Wizard is open close the Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon Windows Software Print Plug In for Office Multi Page Printing PowerPoint iPF8300 4 400 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 419: ...oll Paper Width that is set in the printer 6 Select layout from Layout Selection 7 Select Next 8 Select Media Type Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300 Multi Page Printing PowerPoint 4 401 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 420: ...000 or 14 22 times the roll paper width for Microsoft PowerPoint 2002 or later or 18 0m 11 Press Print to start printing Register the settings PowerPoint If you are going to print multiple times using the same setting you can select One Touch Registration Registered settings can be recalled from Print Using Registered Settings 1 Set up to the Print screen from Print Matching Roll Width Borderless ...

Page 421: ...en will not delete the registered settings Print Using Registered Settings PowerPoint Prints using the registered settings 1 Start Microsoft PowerPoint 2 If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug In is displayed click it 3 Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In toolbar ribbon The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300 Print Using Registered Settin...

Page 422: ...ing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon 4 Click Print Using Registered Settings 5 Click the Next button 6 Select Media Type Windows Software Print Plug In for Office Print Using Registered Settings PowerPoint iPF8300 4 404 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 423: ...ft PowerPoint 2002 or later or 18 0m 9 Press Print to start printing Portrait Orientation Landscape Orientation PowerPoint Print to the edge of the roll width You can print large exhibits and posters or print the Landscape or Portrait Orientation Page Sizes made in the Large Format Printing Wizard Create Page Size in Portrait or Landscape Orientation Use the Large Format Printing Wizard to create ...

Page 424: ...is open close the Large Format Printing Wizard dialog box Otherwise you may not be able to change displays or operate the toolbar ribbon 4 Click Portrait Orientation or Landscape Orientation Note The steps taken to create a Portrait Page Size will be used as an example to explain the procedure Windows Software Print Plug In for Office Portrait Orientation Landscape Orientation PowerPoint iPF8300 4...

Page 425: ...e a form using existing data If that is the case modify the data again Note Printing is done in Print Matching Roll Width of the Printing Wizard For details on Print Match ing Roll Width refer to see Print Matching Roll Width PowerPoint P 394 Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300 Portrait Orientation Landscape Orientation PowerPoint 4 407 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 426: ...layed 4 Click the buttons on the toolbar ribbon according to the items you want to set Icon Contents Menu Displays the About Help and Special Settings dialog boxes See Configuring Special Settings P 418 Printer list Select Printer If you select Show All Printers the imagePROGRAF printers will be displayed again Select this when you want to display all printer drivers or update the dis play Print B...

Page 427: ...ar asking if you want to continue printing If you click No you will return to the application If you click the Print button with a page break set a message dialog box will appear asking if you want to continue printing If you click No you will return to the application If you do not use the set page break check the page break preview and change the setting If you click the Print button with a page...

Page 428: ...ROGRAF Print Plug In toolbar ribbon Important When more than one worksheet is selected the Printing Wizard cannot be run Select only one worksheet and click Print again If a print area is set a confirmation message dialog box will appear To print the entire sheet cancel the setting of the print area The Printing Wizard dialog box is displayed Windows Software Print Plug In for Office Print Entire ...

Page 429: ...column A or row 1 is not displayed the data cannot be analyzed Redisplay the data and then run the analysis Note If data analysis requires time a message dialog will appear If you select No you will return to the application Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300 Print Entire Sheet Excel 4 411 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 430: ... printing is fast but the print quality is poor Press the Print Preview button to display the preview screen You can check and make changes to the layout in the preview screen When you print to the edge of the roll width the maximum print length is 18 0m 12 If the upper and lower margins are too wide check No Spaces at Top or Bottom Conserve Paper The upper and lower margins can be checked in Prin...

Page 431: ... sheet before printing 1 Start Microsoft Excel 2 If Start imagePROGRAF Print Plug In is displayed click it 3 Click Print from the imagePROGRAF Print Plug In toolbar ribbon Important When more than one worksheet is selected the Printing Wizard cannot be run Select only one worksheet and click Print again If a print area is set a confirmation message dialog box will appear To print the selected area...

Page 432: ...ea Important If only one cell is selected Print Selected Area cannot be selected A message will appear informing you that analysis is in progress Windows Software Print Plug In for Office Print Selected Area Excel iPF8300 4 414 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 433: ...the analysis Note If data analysis requires time a message dialog will appear If you select No you will return to the application 5 Select Roll Paper Width that is set in the printer 6 Select image size 7 Select layout 8 To configure Binding click the Binding Settings button Refer to Configuring Binding Excel P 416 for details on the procedure for configuring Binding Windows Software Print Plug In...

Page 434: ...n be checked in Print Preview 13 Press Print to start printing Important If divided into plural pages try reducing the data size or the range you select You cannot run Print or Print Preview if you select it for a worksheet with no data displayed Configuring Binding Excel You can configure Binding margins for binding printouts 1 Configure the settings up to Layout Selection in the Layout screen in...

Page 435: ...age breaks have been set When a sheet or cell is protected Open the Binding Settings dialog box 3 If the Binding checkbox is not checked select it to turn binding on 4 Select Binding Edge 5 Select Binding Margin 6 Click the OK button Return to the Layout screen Windows Software Print Plug In for Office iPF8300 Configuring Binding Excel 4 417 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 436: ...e sizes When this setting is on documents are created at the maximum size This reduces the enlargement ratio during actual printing which mini mizes degradation of the quality of photos etc This function is only valid in Microsoft PowerPoint Center sheets and print areas When this setting is off printing is performed without changing the position When this setting is on printing is performed with ...

Page 437: ... jobs Two screens are available in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor Printer List shows a list of printers and Status Monitor shows details for each printer You can view a list of the printers for which printer drivers have been installed on your computer printers connected to your computer and printers found on the network Windows Software Status Monitor iPF8300 The Features of imagePROGRAF Status Moni...

Page 438: ...nce You can check the status of the hard disk and the documents saved on the hard disk You can use the Accounting Manager to collect the print job logs for the printers and check information such as the printing costs For details of the Accounting Manager see Accounting Manager P 422 Note For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor You...

Page 439: ...sed because the paper specified by the driver does not match the paper currently loaded in the printer Use the procedure below to print the held job 1 Select the held job and click the Replace Paper button 2 Replace the paper in the printer with the correct paper Note To continue printing without changing the paper in the printer select the held job and click Continue to print button The printing ...

Page 440: ...o check which documents were printed from each printer who printed them and when Calculation of the Total Pages Used and the Total Cost This allows you to use the collected print job logs to calculate totals for items such as the number of pages printed the amount of paper used and the printing costs incurred Regular Data Acquisition for Print Jobs This automatically logs print jobs at regular int...

Page 441: ...e Accounting menu Or open the Accounting sheet and click the Accounting button Accounting Manager Main Window The Accounting Manager main window consists of a title bar menu bar toolbars listed job selection area job list area totals area and status bar Windows Software Accounting iPF8300 Launching the Accounting Manager 4 423 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 442: ...ob Selection Area You can use this area to select which job log is displayed If you are using regular data acquisition this area allows you to view the collective job logs for each specified period For more information on how to select the job logs displayed see Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and Regularly Acquired Jobs P 431 Job List Area This area lists the details of acquired jobs...

Page 443: ...Paper have not been set is displayed in the Job Cost field Totals Area Displays the total costs for the selected job and the amounts of paper and ink consumed Note If you are viewing regularly acquired print jobs selecting a period on the left side of the window displays the total costs for that period and the amounts of paper and ink consumed Windows Software Accounting iPF8300 Accounting Manager...

Page 444: ... Print Job Logs at Regular Inter vals P 431 4 Specify the jobs to be listed For details of how to select the job logs displayed see Switching Between Displaying Jobs on Printer and Regu larly Acquired Jobs P 431 This displays the required print job logs and lists the details Configuring Unit Costs in Accounting Manager Select Unit Costs in the Settings menu to open the Unit Costs dialog box Config...

Page 445: ...nter the Tank Capacity and corresponding Price 3 Click the OK button Important Your settings are not applied until you click the OK button To set different unit costs for each ink color 1 Select the ink color to be costed 2 Enter the Tank Capacity and corresponding Price Windows Software Accounting iPF8300 Setting the Unit Cost for Ink 4 427 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 446: ... cost for paper in this sheet 1 Select a media type from the Media Type list 2 Enter the Width and Length of the paper and the Price per area for the configured width x height 3 Click the Add button To change the unit cost for a media type you have already set click the Overwrite button 4 Click the OK button Windows Software Accounting Setting the Unit Cost for Paper iPF8300 4 428 Downloaded from ...

Page 447: ...eld 2 Enter a value in Unit Cost 3 Use Allocated to specify whether the costs are allocated as being incurred by the print job 4 Click the Add button To change the unit cost for a media type you have already set click the Overwrite button 5 Click the OK button Note You can set unit costs for up to 5 items Windows Software Accounting iPF8300 Setting the Unit Cost for Items Other Than Ink and Paper ...

Page 448: ...month and DD the day Currency Unit Enter the currency unit Enter a text string up to 3 characters long 1000 Separator Use this option to select the symbol used as a separator in numbers The symbol is inserted every 3 digits Decimal Symbol Use this option to select the symbol used as a decimal point Ink Consumed Use this option to select the unit used for ink consumption Paper Width Use this to sel...

Page 449: ...les see Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File P 432 Important Print job log collection is not performed when Set Adj Menu Printer Info Show Job Log of the con trol panel is Off However even if Show Job Log is set to Off regularly acquired jobs that already have been retrieved at that time are displayed Canceling Regular Print Job Log Acquisition You can use this procedure to cancel the regular ac...

Page 450: ...o Monthly and set Starting Date to 1 Note Up to 10 000 regularly acquired jobs are displayed for each printer Exporting Print Job Data as a CSV File You can export the collected print job data in the form of a CSV file by selecting Export Job Cost Data in the File menu Note You can also select Export Job Cost Data using the icon in the toolbar Selected Jobs Exports the data for the selected print ...

Page 451: ...a destination folder using Save Unit Cost Data in the File menu The unit cost data for items such as the selected ink and paper is saved as a file Load Unit Cost Data Selecting Load Unit Cost Data in the File menu loads saved unit cost data Showing the Total Amount of Ink and Paper Consumed Select Show Ink and Paper Consumed in the File menu to open the Show Ink and Paper Consumed dialog box This ...

Page 452: ... Digital Photo Front Access can help you manage images in many ways from editing to printing as an effective way to work with other applications Digital Photo Front Access also enables image retouching For automatic retouching select an image for retouching and click Image Adjustment Because this application automates the workflow from retouching to display for all of your images it can save time ...

Page 453: ...s are online in the network by checking the printer list Communication between your com puter and these printers is possible Note We recommend that your network or printer administrator complete the setup work using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility help Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility Install imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility...

Page 454: ...s Administrator ac count We recommend that your network administrator configure the network settings For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility see Installing imagePROGRAF De vice Setup Utility P 435 When specifying an IPv4 IP address 1 Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu 2 In the Device Name list displayed select the printer to configure 3 Choose Prot...

Page 455: ...isplayed 8 Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility Note To configure the IP address automatically choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select DHCP BOOTP or RARP You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway Windows Software Device Setup Utility iPF8300 Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility 4 437 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 456: ...vice Name list displayed select the printer to configure 3 Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu 4 Select the IPv6 tab 5 In IPv6 select On Windows Software Device Setup Utility Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility iPF8300 4 438 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 457: ...te When there is no IPv6 compatible router or DHCPv6 compatible server select On in Manual and enter the IPv6 Address and Prefix Length 7 Click Set 8 Click OK after the Confirmation message is displayed 9 Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility Windows Software Device Setup Utility iPF8300 Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility 4 439 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Ma...

Page 458: ...ver dialog boxes and rename them in addition to other functions You can add custom paper paper that is not Canon genuine paper or Canon feed confirmed paper to the printer con trol panel and printer driver Important Normally the Media Configuration Tool is installed and the media information is configured when you in stall the printer driver from the User Software CD ROM Use this software if you w...

Page 459: ...allation procedure started from this screen is described below Important If the printer driver is installed from the User Software CD ROM the Media Configuration Tool is also in stalled and the media information is also configured Therefore the following procedure does not normally need to be performed To install the Media Configuration Tool without using the User Software CD ROM such as when you ...

Page 460: ...lect a country or territory then click the Next button 3 The License Agreement is displayed Select I accept the terms of the license agreement and click the Next button Windows Software Media Configuration Tool Installation Procedures iPF8300 4 442 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 461: ...lect the destination folder then click the Next button 5 The Ready to Install the Program screen appears Click the Install button Windows Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300 Installation Procedures 4 443 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 462: ... Starting the Media Configuration Tool Follow the procedure below to start Media Configuration Tool From the start menu go to Programs iPFxxxx Media Configuration Tool iPFxxxx Media Configuration Tool Media Configuration Tool main window is displayed Windows Software Media Configuration Tool Starting the Media Configuration Tool iPF8300 4 444 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 463: ...ls on Add Genuine Paper Add Custom Paper button When this button is clicked the Add Custom Paper dialog box is displayed which allows you to added custom paper pa per that is not Canon genuine paper or Canon feed confirmed paper to the printer control panel and printer driver Refer to Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper Feed Confirmed Paper P 458 for details on Add Custom Pa per Link to Support I...

Page 464: ...only be performed for Canon genuine paper and feed confirmed paper Refer to Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper Feed Confirmed Paper P 458 for details on adding editing and deleting custom paper Cus tom paper displays Custom as the Status in the Media Type list To add media types download the media information file amf file in advance from the Canon website Note It may not be possible to deleting...

Page 465: ...es dialog box and then click the Add button 2 The Add Media Type dialog box displays Click the Browse button Windows Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300 Adding Media Types 4 447 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 466: ... Type dialog box Select the check boxes of paper to add and click the OK button Important If Master Media Information File is displayed as the Type of the Media Information File the me dia type display order and media type display non display settings are initialized Reconfigure these after added the master media information file 5 Click OK when the confirmation message is displayed Windows Softwa...

Page 467: ... using the Update Media Types wizard see Updating Media Types P 456 Important Be sure to click the Update button If you do not your changes will not be applied to the printer and printer driver Changing Media Names 1 Open the Edit Media Types dialog box Windows Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300 Changing Media Names 4 449 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 468: ... dialog box is displayed Edit the names in Name in Printer Driver and Name on Control Panel and click the OK button Note To restore the original names click the Restore button Windows Software Media Configuration Tool Changing Media Names iPF8300 4 450 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 469: ...te Media Types wizard see Updating Media Types P 456 Important Be sure to click the Update button If you do not your changes will not be applied to the printer and printer driver Deleting Media Types You Have Added 1 Open the Edit Media Types dialog box Windows Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300 Deleting Media Types You Have Added 4 451 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 470: ...te Media Types wizard is started at this point For details on the procedure to update paper information using the Update Media Types wizard see Updating Media Types P 456 Important Be sure to click the Update button If you do not your changes will not be applied to the printer and printer driver Windows Software Media Configuration Tool Deleting Media Types You Have Added iPF8300 4 452 Downloaded ...

Page 471: ...Note The names of media switched for non display appear grayed out in the Media Type list Each time you click the Show Hide button the display mode cycles from showing both the printer driver and printer panel to hiding both the printer driver and printer panel and then to showing only the printer panel Windows Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300 Switching Media Types Display Show Hide 4 453...

Page 472: ...ia Types wizard see Updating Media Types P 456 Important Be sure to click the Update button If you do not your changes will not be applied to the printer and printer driver Changing the Display Order of Media Types 1 Open the Edit Media Types dialog box Windows Software Media Configuration Tool Changing the Display Order of Media Types iPF8300 4 454 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 473: ...utton The Update Media Types wizard is started at this point For details on the procedure to update paper information using the Update Media Types wizard see Updating Media Types P 456 Important Be sure to click the Update button If you do not your changes will not be applied to the printer and printer driver Windows Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300 Changing the Display Order of Media Typ...

Page 474: ...n perform the same update on all of the PCs that are using that printer 1 Confirm the printer where media type information is to be updated to be displayed in Printer in the Update Media Types Select Printer dialog box and then click the Next button Note If the printer driver is not installed the following dialog box is displayed Select how the printer to update is connected 2 Communication with t...

Page 475: ...irm Update Confirm the information received from the printer To update click the Execute button Important When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated the selected media informa tion file is updated When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer click the Cancel button 4 Communication with the printer starts and the following dialog box is displaye...

Page 476: ...in Step 1 and update the media information by following the Update Media Types wizard Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper Feed Confirmed Paper When the Add Custom Paper button is clicked in the Media Configuration Tool main window the Add Custom Paper dialog box is displayed Adding custom paper to the printer control panel and printer driver is performed from this screen Note Custom paper is pape...

Page 477: ... feed confirmed paper cannot be changed from this dialog box Refer to Editing Media Type Information P 446 Changing the display order of media types displayed in the printer control panel and printer driver is per formed from the Edit Media Types dialog box regardless of whether it is Canon genuine paper or custom paper Refer to Editing Media Type Information P 446 Compatible Paper Paper specifica...

Page 478: ... paper that is not Canon genuine paper or Canon feed confirmed paper Add Custom Paper In order to add new custom paper to the printer control panel and printer driver first select the media type to use as the basis from among the Canon genuine paper and feed confirmed paper Add this as custom paper after making various changes to the standard paper as necessary Important Do not execute printing on...

Page 479: ... The Step 1 Select the standard paper dialog box is displayed In Paper Category select the category of media type to use as the basis of the custom paper you are adding Important Select the category that you think is the closest to the custom paper you are adding Windows Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300 Add Custom Paper 4 461 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 480: ...t the media type called General from among the displayed Media Type Name Depending on the selected category there might not be a media type called General Depending on the selected category the Assist button may be disabled 5 The Step 2 Set the custom paper name dialog box is displayed Enter an arbitrary name to display in the printer control panel and printer driver and then click the Next button...

Page 481: ...button Important Check that there is no paper left on the ejection guide If Paper Feed Adjustment is not executed horizontal stripes with different color tones may appear in the printed material Paper feed adjustment does not need to be executed more than once Execute paper feed adjustment only once each time you add a custom paper 9 The Roll Paper Settings dialog box is displayed Note If a paper ...

Page 482: ...e ink to dry User Cut Cutting is not performed by the cutter unit Cut the roll paper using scissors after each sheet Select this for paper that cannot be cut by the cutter unit Drying Time Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry as needed Off Ejects immediately after printing finishes 30 sec 1 min 3 min 5 min 10 min 30 min 60 min Ejects after the speci fied time has elapsed after pr...

Page 483: ...r set the Automatic Cutting Settings to User Cut and cut the roll paper using scissors etc Paper where borderless printing can be performed is limited by the media type and roll paper width Refer to Compatible Paper P 459 For custom paper where there is a need to set the Automatic Cutting Settings to User Cut set the Borderless Printing to Deny 10 The Step 5 Configure the amount of ink used dialog...

Page 484: ...the ink level that is thought to give the best visual test print results with no bleeding or scraping of ink Note Select the optimal ink level by referring to the help If you cannot obtain sufficiently high quality printing no matter which maximum ink usage level you select use the Step 1 Select the standard paper dialog box to change the paper that is the basis of the custom paper to another pape...

Page 485: ... unselectable 13 Configure Head Height and Vacuum Strength as required and click the Next button Usually these do not need to be set Important If you set the Head Height lower than the automatically set height in parentheses check that the printhead does not rub against the paper If the printhead rubs against the paper there will be scratches in the printing results If the printhead rubs against t...

Page 486: ...hen click the Execute button The custom paper is added to the control panel of the printer and to the printer driver of the PC you are using Important If you have added custom paper with the POP Board Cardboard category as the Standard Paper remove the loaded custom paper from the printer Windows Software Media Configuration Tool Add Custom Paper iPF8300 4 468 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Ma...

Page 487: ...indow Delete Custom Paper You can delete custom paper that you have already added from printer control panel and from the printer driver of the PC you are using 1 Open the Add Custom Paper dialog box 2 Select the paper you want to delete from the Added Custom Paper list and then click the Delete button Windows Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300 Delete Custom Paper 4 469 Downloaded from Manu...

Page 488: ...e button The custom paper is deleted from the control panel of the printer and from the printer driver of the PC you are using Edit Custom Paper You can change the settings of custom paper you have already added 1 Open the Add Custom Paper dialog box Windows Software Media Configuration Tool Edit Custom Paper iPF8300 4 470 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 489: ... to configure each setting Export Custom Media Information You can export to file and save media information about custom paper that you have added The saved Custom Media Information File can be used by importing it into another printer or PC Refer to Import Custom Media Information P 472 for details on importing custom media information 1 Open the Add Custom Paper dialog box Windows Software Medi...

Page 490: ...Information File am1 file is saved Import Custom Media Information You can import a Custom Media Information File that has been saved in a folder and add the file to the printer control panel and to the printer driver of the PC you are using 1 Open the Add Custom Paper dialog box Windows Software Media Configuration Tool Import Custom Media Information iPF8300 4 472 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter ...

Page 491: ...e custom paper to Note Double click Custom Media Information File to start the Media Configuration Tool and display this screen Windows Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300 Import Custom Media Information 4 473 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 492: ...e printer driver of the PC you are using Note When the custom paper is correctly added to the printer driver the name of the added custom paper is displayed in the Edit Media Types dialog box that is opened by Add Genuine Paper in the Media Configuration Tool window Windows Software Media Configuration Tool Import Custom Media Information iPF8300 4 474 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 493: ...g the Vacuum Strength set the Head Height to be higher in the Step 5 Configure the amount of ink used dialog box Refer to Paper rubs against the Printhead for details on how to handle the printhead rubbing against the paper See Paper rubs against the printhead P 1058 About Borderless Printing When performing borderless printing on paper where the ink does not dry well the cutter unit may leave scr...

Page 494: ...r the custom paper in the Step 1 Select the standard paper dialog box If there is no luster in printed material set the paper used as the basis for the custom paper to a paper that uses photo ink as the Black ink The types of Black ink used are displayed on the right side of each media type in the Step 1 Select the standard paper dialog box Note Refer to Problems with the printing quality for deta...

Page 495: ...iew 511 Free Layout 542 Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 576 Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional 601 Printmonitor 668 Media Configuration Tool 671 Mac OS X Software iPF8300 5 477 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 496: ...ane 494 Ambient Light Adjust dialog box 497 Light Source Check Tool 499 Color Settings Pane Color 500 Object Adjustment dialog box Color 501 Color Settings Pane Monochrome 502 Object Adjustment dialog box Monochrome 503 Gray Adjustment Pane 504 Page Setup Pane 506 Utility Pane 508 Additional Settings Pane 509 Support Pane 510 Printer Driver Settings For instructions on accessing the Mac OS X print...

Page 497: ...ject Adjustment dialog box Color P 501 Matching pane P 494 Ambient Light Adjust dialog box P 497 Light Source Check Tool P 499 Color Settings Pane Monochrome P 502 Object Adjustment dialog box Monochrome P 503 Gray Adjustment Pane P 504 Page Setup Pane P 506 You can specify the page size of the original borderless printing enlargement or reduction the orientation the paper size and source and auto...

Page 498: ...als from a Color imageRUNNER For details see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy P 576 Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver If you have replaced the paper you must complete the following settings in the printer driver 1 This sets the BFormat for and CPaper Size Note The configuration method varies depending on the OS and application software you are using If Page Setup is displayed in the applica...

Page 499: ...OK to close the dialog box and then select Print from the application software menu 5 Access the Main pane 6 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded 7 Access the Page Setup pane Mac OS X Software Printer Driver iPF8300 Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver 5 481 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 500: ...n BRoll Width click LPrinter Informa tion on the Main pane to update the printer information Note A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications For details on available printing conditions see Printer Driver Settings P 478 Confirming Print Settings There are two ways to confirm what printing conditions have been specified as follows Checking a pr...

Page 501: ...centage of enlargement or reduction is displayed Pane displayed when the ISize tab is clicked Paper size details are indicated numerically Pane with printer and paper illus trations Illustrations indicate the paper source orientation borderless printing selection and other settings information Note To confirm the Print Target specified in Easy Settings click GView set on the Main pane to display t...

Page 502: ...nting using the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview function 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Access the Main pane 3 Select the OPrint Preview check box 4 Click MPrint Mac OS X Software Printer Driver Checking the Layout in a Preview Before Printing iPF8300 5 484 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 503: ... click Save As in the Presets list to save the current print settings This is a stand ard feature of the operating system For details refer to the Mac OS documentation Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications 1 In the application software select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions Note This dialog box includes basic printing options and enabl...

Page 504: ...d printing borderless printing and so on Main Pane The following settings are available on the Main pane For details on settings items refer to the printer driver help Note On the Main pane choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the print target or switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired Mac OS X Software Printer Driver Main Pane iPF8300 5 4...

Page 505: ...s You can configure the printing settings to match the type of media such as the ink dry ing time Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box P 492 OPrint Preview If you turn this on imagePROGRAF Preview starts before printing This allows you to check on screen previews of documents before printing Important This cannot be selected if Free Layout is enabled in the Page Setup panel Checking the Layout in a ...

Page 506: ...ose the level of print quality GView set Click to display the View settings dialog box which enables you to confirm the settings for the selected item from the EPrint Target list or change the order of items listed in EPrint Target View settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application P 493 Mac OS X Software Printer Driver Main Pane iPF8300 5 488 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 507: ...on Photographs may not be selected depending on the AMedia Type you select NHigh Precision Photographs and KHigh Precision Text and Fine Lines cannot be checked at the same time To improve print quality you may need to adjust the position of the printhead See Enhancing Printing Quality P 837 GInput Bit Depth Choose the levels of gradation in print data either 8 bit or 16 bit Optimal results when p...

Page 508: ...ove the print quality However the printing speed becomes slower QThicken Fine Lines Activate this option to print fine lines more distinctly KHigh Precision Text and Fine Lines Print increasing ink impact accuracy particularly for sharper text and fine lines However this takes more time than regular printing Note KHigh Precision Text and Fine Lines may not be selected depending on the AMedia Type ...

Page 509: ...on Printer dialog box on the Main pane click Get Information by Media Type See Main Pane P 486 APaper Source Shows the Paper Source supported by the printer as well as the type of paper loaded To update the media type setting in the printer driver select the desired Paper Source option and click OK Mac OS X Software Printer Driver iPF8300 Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box 5 491 Downloaded fr...

Page 510: ...o the Paper Reference Guide See Types of Pa per P 768 BDrying Time Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry as needed The Drying Time setting is only valid for rolls See Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls P 792 CBetween Pages Specify the time the printer waits after printing a page until ejecting the paper as needed DBetween Scans Specify the time the printer waits after printi...

Page 511: ...c cutting and printing of cut lines as desired In this list specify Printer Default None or Print Cut Guideline ICalibration Value You can specify whether to apply the results of calibration performed on the printer to image processing JMirror Specify whether to print a mirror image as needed Select this option to print a version of the document or image with the left and right sides inverted View...

Page 512: ...Print Target list Matching pane On the Matching pane you can specify color matching to compensate for differences in the appearance of colors on various devices Important If No color correction is selected under Color Mode the Matching pane is not displayed Note To display the Matching pane on the Main pane click Color Settings in Color Mode in Advanced Set tings and then click the Matching tab Re...

Page 513: ...ect Driver Matching Mode in the AMatching Mode list AMatching Mode Select the color matching mode to use as desired Normally select Driver Matching Mode For color matching based on ICC profiles select ICC Matching Mode depend ing on your color matching system BMatching Method Select the color matching method that suits the document to be printed Various BMatching Method options are available depen...

Page 514: ...ght Ambient Light Adjust dialog box P 497 ICC Matching Mode The following options are available when you select ICC Matching Mode in the AMatching Mode list Note To display the Matching pane on the Main pane click Color Settings by Color Mode in Advanced Set tings and then click the Matching tab See Main Pane P 486 AMatching Mode Select the color matching mode to use as desired BInput Profile Sett...

Page 515: ...hen you select By selecting a chart number in Setting Method ASetting Method You can choose configuration based on the printed Chart or based on using the i1 colorimeter BPrint Chart Click to start the Light Source Check Tool for printing Chart Light Source Check Tool P 499 CChart Number In Chart select the number of the pattern with your desired colors DColor Temperature Enter the DColor Temperat...

Page 516: ...er BLighting Source Type Select the light source measured using the i1 colorimeter DColor Temperature Enter the DColor Temperature measured using the i1 colorimeter EIlluminance Enter the EIlluminance measured using the i1 colorimeter Displayed when the BMatching Method is set to Monitor Matching on the Matching pane Note For details on settings items see Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver ...

Page 517: ...f paper compatible with Driver Matching Mode refer to the Paper Reference Guide See Types of Paper P 768 CPaper Source Choose the paper source as desired Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in BMedia Type in the Main pane DPrint Click to print the Chart Mac OS X Software Printer Driver iPF8300 Light Source Check Tool 5 499 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 518: ... pane click Color Settings by Color Mode in Ad vanced Settings See Main Pane P 486 ASample Type Choose a sample image from Standard Portrait Landscape or Graphics BView Color Pattern Select this checkbox to display the color pattern CApply to Sample Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings to the sample image DCyan EMagenta FYellow Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of each colo...

Page 519: ... details on settings items see Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver P 42 KObject Adjustment Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box in which you can specify objects subject to color adjust ment Object Adjustment dialog box Color P 501 Object Adjustment dialog box Color In the Object Adjustment dialog box you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment ...

Page 520: ...nochrome printing you can adjust the brightness and contrast Note To display the Color Adjustment pane on the Main pane click Color Settings in Advanced Settings See Main Pane P 486 ASample Type Choose a sample image from Standard Portrait Landscape or Graphics BView Color Pattern Select this checkbox to display the color pattern CApply to Sample Select this checkbox to apply the changed settings ...

Page 521: ...uration Not available Note For details on settings items see Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver P 42 KObject Adjustment Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box in which you can specify objects subject to color adjust ment Only supported in Mac OS X 10 3 9 10 6 Object Adjustment dialog box Monochrome P 503 Object Adjustment dialog box Monochrome In the Object Adjustmen...

Page 522: ... text Gray Adjustment Pane The following settings are available on the Gray Adjustment pane Gray Adjustment On the Gray Adjustment pane you can adjust the color balance brightness contrast and other image qualities Note To display the Gray Adjustment pane on theMain Pane P 486 select Monochrome Photo by Color Mode in Advanced Settings and then click Color Settings Monochrome Photo is not available...

Page 523: ...he DX horizontal and EY vertical boxes or enter the values directly FBrightness Adjust the overall image brightness as desired You can adjust the brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image that is the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it appears on the computer screen GContrast Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions re...

Page 524: ...splays the size of the original as specified in the page settings of the application For details on page sizes available in the application see Paper Sizes P 771 DEnlarged Reduced Printing Select this checkbox to choose the following options Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size P 61 Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width P 67 Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value P 73 EFit Paper S...

Page 525: ...center of the paper Printing Originals Centered on Rolls P 149 Printing Originals Centered on Sheets P 155 KNo Spaces at Top or Bottom Select this checkbox to print the next image skipping blank areas above and below printable data in documents which ena bles you to conserve the paper Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins P 167 LRotate Page 90 degrees Select th...

Page 526: ...ng Head alignment adjustment Feed amount adjustment BView Click to start imagePROGRAF Printmonitor which enables you to view the status of print jobs CSet Click to complete the settings for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iR enlargement copy For details see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy P 576 Mac OS X Software Printer Driver Utility Pane iPF8300 5 508 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Man...

Page 527: ...ediately to Printer CSend All Print Data as Batch to Printer DSend job to You can configure the method for saving print jobs to the printer hard disk EPrint FSave in mail box GPrint after reception is complete Jobs are printed after they are saved on the hard disk Mac OS X Software Printer Driver iPF8300 Additional Settings Pane 5 509 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 528: ...nd browse other information BUser Manual Click to view the printer user s manual This function requires the user s manual to be installed on your computer CSettings The settings can be saved as a file Click to display the Export dialog box which enables you to specify where to save the file DAbout You can display version information for the printer driver Mac OS X Software Printer Driver Support P...

Page 529: ...h Actual Size 540 Moving a Page 540 The Features of Preview The main features of Preview are as follows While viewing this screen you can adjust layout settings of a document created with application software You can not only adjust layout settings but also your changes will be instantly applied on the preview screen and you can print the preview screen as it is seen Note The media type image size...

Page 530: ...inter setup menu to open the Print dialog box Note Normally select Print from the File menu 3 Click Print Preview in the Main panel to attach a checkmark 4 Click the Print button in the Print dialog box Note Your printer is depicted in the lower left area of this screen Mac OS X Software Preview Starting Preview iPF8300 5 512 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 531: ... Preview main window consists of the menu and tool bars and preview dialog drawer and status area Note You can use the View menu to show or hide the tool bar Mac OS X Software Preview iPF8300 Preview Main Window 5 513 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 532: ... operations Tool Bar This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations Preview Area You can check the settings you made in this area Mac OS X Software Preview Preview Main Window iPF8300 5 514 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 533: ...rawer Area This allows you to display the thumbnails of a document This area appears when you click Drawer from the tool bar Alternatively you may select Drawer from the View menu Mac OS X Software Preview iPF8300 Preview Main Window 5 515 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 534: ... set in the printer When the media you chose is different from the media set in the printer you may not receive the desired print results Easy Settings Advanced Settings Two modes are available to provide the optimum print settings for jobs The settings available on each mode are as follows Easy Settings P 518 Advanced Settings P 519 Mac OS X Software Preview Paper Settings Panel iPF8300 5 516 Dow...

Page 535: ...are selected in Paper Source Copies You can input the number of print copies in numerical characters Note The maximum value is 999 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Restore Defaults Button Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Preview Print Button Click the button to begin printing Update Printer Info Button Click the button to acquire printer informat...

Page 536: ...nd graphics Photo Color Suitable for printing photographic images captured with a digital camera Poster The best setting for posters Prints using vivid and high impact colors Faithful Color Reproduction Prints by faithfully reproducing the colors of the original image Photo Adobe RGB Achieves the best color when printing an image created with the Adobe RGB color space feature Office Document Suita...

Page 537: ...t priority selections Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Draft however print quality is high er Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Draft than with High however print quality is lower Advanced Settings Presents detailed settings for the print quality the color mode and other items so you can select the values for these settings yourself Print Pr...

Page 538: ...ty of the printed image and printing speed The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations Setting Details Print Quality Highest High Standard Draft Resolution 600dpi 300dpi Note The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Draft howe...

Page 539: ...width Make sure that the width of the roll paper in the printer is set correctly for Roll Paper Width in the Paper Settings panel Displayed only if rolls are selected in Paper Source Scaling Enlarges reduces the whole page by the scaling rate as specified Input the scaling value in numerical characters You can specify a range between 5 and 600 You can change the numbers by clicking either button o...

Page 540: ... information about No Spaces at Top or Bottom see Not Print Spaces at the Top Bottom P 536 Note Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source Rotate Page Select the method for rotating page The following settings are available for rotating page Setting Details Rotate Right 90 Degrees Rotates the portrait page right 90 degrees and print in landscape orientation When the rotated page can fit ...

Page 541: ...ome photo image data in a gray scale that is free of color casting phenomenon of grays that appear tinted Monochrome Disables color printing and converts image from continuous color to grayscaled monochrome No color correction Prints without performing color matching in the printer driver Select this when color matching is performed by the application such as Adobe Photoshop or when you want to pr...

Page 542: ...Mode Restore Defaults Button Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Preview Print Button Click the button to begin printing Update Printer Info Button Click the button to acquire printer information Color Adjustment You can set the color adjustment Adjusting Color Normally colors should be adjusted in the software application but if you see colors in the printout that do not match ...

Page 543: ...g and graphics created on the display or when you want to print in different degrees of brightness use this feature Contrast Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest portions of the image For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the con trast Saturation Adjusts the hues for vivid color or dark color Gray Tone Adjusts gray from cool black bluish ...

Page 544: ... printout are brighter than the original images such as the original photo before scanning and graphics created on the display or when you want to print in different degrees of brightness use this feature Contrast Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest portions of the image For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the con trast Note You can al...

Page 545: ...lor Balance list and select the color settings Setting Details Cool Black Adjusts cool black blue tones to gray Pure Neutral Black Adjusts to neutral gray Warm Black Adjusts warm black red tones to gray Note To perform the adjustments drag the X or Y slide bar left and right You can also click the up or down arrow or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the value by X and Y Mac OS X S...

Page 546: ...d darkest portions of the image For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the con trast Highlight Adjusts the brightness of the brightest areas Shadow Adjusts the brightness of the darkest areas Note You can also click the up or down arrow or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the value The availability of settings depends on the selected the media type Ma...

Page 547: ...for digital cameras and scanners ICC profiles created us ing the profile creation tool etc ColorSync P 533 Enables color matching by using the ColorSync function of Mac OS Select this if you want to perform soft proofing using ColorSync before printing Note You need to set each correction on the printer driver Using Mac OS X 10 5 or later ColorSync needs to be selected in the Color Matching panel ...

Page 548: ... OS X 10 3 9 10 4 You can select only after ICC Matching Mode or ColorSync has been se lected in Matching Mode Using Mac OS X 10 5 or later You can select only after ICC Matching Mode has been selected in Match ing Mode Soft Proof When you place a checkmark here ColorSync applies to the preview area Note You can select only after ColorSync has been selected in Matching Mode Mac OS X Software Previ...

Page 549: ...ters etc vividly Colorimetric Color matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input color space This is the easiest to use mode when you want to adjust the color and print However gradation may be lost for colors of wider range than the color re production range of the printer Generally this is also called relative colorimetric Perceptual People Dark Areas Color matching o...

Page 550: ...l photos attractively Smooth grada tion is a feature This is also an easy to use mode when performing color adjust ment using application software Saturation Color matching optimized for printing posters etc vividly Colorimetric Color matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input color space This is the easiest to use mode when you want to adjust the color and print Howe...

Page 551: ...he image data Generally this also is called absolute colorimetric 3 Click the Input Profile list and select an input profile 4 Click the Printer Profile list and select a printer profile ColorSync 1 Check that ColorSync is selected in Matching Mode 2 To apply ColorSync to previews check the Soft Proof check box Mac OS X Software Preview iPF8300 ColorSync 5 533 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Ma...

Page 552: ...View menu You can enlarge or reduce the screen display Scaling Set the magnification for enlargement or reduction of the screen display Note You can input between 10 and 400 You can change the numbers by clicking button Go to Page Dialog Box This dialog box appears when you select Go to Page from the View menu Note You can not select Go to Page if the document is only one page Mac OS X Software Pr...

Page 553: ...g can be performed only between two edges To use the borderless printing function the specified media must be set to the printer 1 On the Paper Settings Panel P 516 select Roll Paper in Paper Source 2 On the Output Settings panel click the Enlarged Reduced Printing check box on 3 Select Fit Roll Paper Width 4 Click the Borderless Printing check box on 5 Click the Print button Borderless printing b...

Page 554: ...t button Printing on the center begins Not Print Spaces at the Top Bottom You can save paper on not to feed roll paper for the empty spaces when the print data contains spaces at the top or bottom Note This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing 1 On the Paper Settings Panel P 516 select Roll Paper in Paper Source Mac OS X Software Preview Print on the Center iPF8300 5 ...

Page 555: ...ttom begins Print Page Rotated 90 Degrees You can save paper by printing in landscape orientation on roll paper 1 On the Paper Settings Panel P 516 select Roll Paper in Paper Source 2 On the Output Settings panel click the Rotate Page check box on Mac OS X Software Preview iPF8300 Print Page Rotated 90 Degrees 5 537 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 556: ... 90 degrees begins Display with Fitting to the Width of the Paper In the preview area you can display to the width of the paper 1 Select Fit Roll Paper Width from the tool bar Mac OS X Software Preview Display with Fitting to the Width of the Paper iPF8300 5 538 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 557: ...per it is displayed Display with All In the preview area you can display all 1 Select Fit Screen from the tool bar 2 All is displayed Mac OS X Software Preview iPF8300 Display with All 5 539 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 558: ...displayed Moving a Page You can move a page to display in the preview area 1 Select each button in Go to Page on the tool bar Setting Details Go to the first page Go to the previous page Go to the next page Go to the last page Mac OS X Software Preview Display with Actual Size iPF8300 5 540 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 559: ...2 The target page appears Note You can also move a page by clicking the page on the thumbnails Mac OS X Software Preview iPF8300 Moving a Page 5 541 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 560: ...gning Objects 571 Changing the Object Overlapping Order 573 Pasting a Copied or Cut Object 575 The Features of Free Layout The main features of Free Layout are as follows Allows you to lay out at will and print a document created with application software You can not only lay out multiple pages on one page but also lay out and print a multiple file document on one page or lay out and print a docum...

Page 561: ...lect the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box Note Normally select Print from the File menu 3 Click on Free Layout in the Page Setup panel to attach a checkmark 4 Click the Print button in the Print dialog box Note Your printer is depicted in the lower left area of this screen Mac OS X Software Free Layout iPF8300 Starting Free Layout 5 543 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 562: ...ow The Free Layout main window consists of the menu and tool bars layout area and dialog areas Note You can use the View menu to show or hide the tool Mac OS X Software Free Layout Free Layout Main Window iPF8300 5 544 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 563: ...Bar This allows you to select tool buttons required for major operations Layout Area This allows you to lay out objects and edit the object size and orientation Mac OS X Software Free Layout iPF8300 Free Layout Main Window 5 545 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 564: ...Dialog Area This allows you to set the print conditions and perform a print job Mac OS X Software Free Layout Free Layout Main Window iPF8300 5 546 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 565: ...ceive the desired print results Easy Settings Advanced Settings Two modes are available to provide the optimum print settings for jobs The settings available on each mode are as follows Easy Settings P 549 Advanced Settings P 550 Paper Source You can select the paper source The following settings are available for paper source Setting Details Cut Sheet Select to print on the cut sheet Mac OS X Sof...

Page 566: ...s in numerical characters Note The maximum value is 999 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Restore Defaults Button Click the button to reset to the setting when starting Free Layout Print Button Click the button to begin printing Update Printer Info Button Click the button to acquire printer information Mac OS X Software Free Layout Paper Settings Panel iPF8300 5 548 Do...

Page 567: ... and graphics Photo Color Suitable for printing photographic images captured with a digital camera Photo Monochrome Suitable for optimized printing of monochrome photos Poster The best setting for posters Prints using vivid and high impact colors Faithful Color Reproduction Prints by faithfully reproducing the colors of the original image Photo Adobe RGB Achieves the best color when printing an im...

Page 568: ... Note The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Draft however print quality is high er Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Draft than with High however print quality is lower Advanced Settings Presents detailed settings for the print priority the print quality an...

Page 569: ...ty strikes a balance between the quality of the printed image and printing speed The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations Setting Details Print Quality Highest High Standard Draft Resolution 600dpi 300dpi Note The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections Printing time is longer and more ink is c...

Page 570: ... continuous color to grayscaled monochrome No color correction Prints without performing color matching in the printer driver Select this when color matching is performed by the application such as Adobe Photoshop or when you want to print color charts using the profile creation tool Note The availability of settings depends on the print priority and media type selections Color Adjustment Gray Adj...

Page 571: ...tton Click the button to begin printing Update Printer Info Button Click the button to acquire printer information Color Adjustment You can set the color adjustment Adjusting Color Normally colors should be adjusted in the software application but if you see colors in the printout that do not match colors on the screen you can perform color adjustments 1 Select Color on Color Mode in the Color Set...

Page 572: ...and graphics created on the display or when you want to print in different degrees of brightness use this feature Contrast Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest portions of the image For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the con trast Saturation Adjusts the hues for vivid color or dark color Gray Tone Adjusts gray from cool black bluish to...

Page 573: ...rintout are brighter than the original images such as the original photo before scanning and graphics created on the display or when you want to print in different degrees of brightness use this feature Contrast Adjusts the relative brightness between the brightest and darkest portions of the image For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the con trast Note You can also...

Page 574: ...r Balance list and select the color settings Setting Details Cool Black Adjusts cool black blue tones to gray Pure Neutral Black Adjusts to neutral gray Warm Black Adjusts warm black red tones to gray Note To perform the adjustments drag the X or Y slide bar left and right You can also click the up or down arrow or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the value by X and Y Mac OS X Sof...

Page 575: ...darkest portions of the image For soft gradation decrease the contrast For hard gradation increase the con trast Highlight Adjusts the brightness of the brightest areas Shadow Adjusts the brightness of the darkest areas Note You can also click the up or down arrow or enter the number directly to increase or decrease the value The availability of settings depends on the selected the media type Matc...

Page 576: ...r digital cameras and scanners ICC profiles created us ing the profile creation tool etc ColorSync P 562 Enables color matching by using the ColorSync function of Mac OS Select this if you want to perform soft proofing using ColorSync before printing Note You need to set each correction on the printer driver Using Mac OS X 10 5 or later ColorSync needs to be selected in the Color Matching panel of...

Page 577: ...OS X 10 3 9 10 4 You can select only after ICC Matching Mode or ColorSync has been se lected in Matching Mode Using Mac OS X 10 5 or later You can select only after ICC Matching Mode has been selected in Match ing Mode Soft Proof When you place a checkmark here ColorSync applies to the layout area Note You can select only after ColorSync has been selected in Matching Mode Mac OS X Software Free La...

Page 578: ...rs etc vividly Colorimetric Color matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input color space This is the easiest to use mode when you want to adjust the color and print However gradation may be lost for colors of wider range than the color re production range of the printer Generally this is also called relative colorimetric Perceptual People Dark Areas Color matching opt...

Page 579: ...photos attractively Smooth grada tion is a feature This is also an easy to use mode when performing color adjust ment using application software Saturation Color matching optimized for printing posters etc vividly Colorimetric Color matching optimized for printing image data with accurate colors in input color space This is the easiest to use mode when you want to adjust the color and print Howeve...

Page 580: ...ata Generally this also is called absolute colorimetric 3 Click the Input Profile list and select an input profile 4 Click the Printer Profile list and select a printer profile ColorSync 1 Check that ColorSync is selected in Matching Mode 2 Place a checkmark on Soft Proof to simulate the output product in Layout Area Mac OS X Software Free Layout ColorSync iPF8300 5 562 Downloaded from ManualsPrin...

Page 581: ...e You can input between 10 0 and 200 0 mm between 0 39 and 7 87 inch You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Divisions You can change the number of divisions of grid lines so that they serve as a guide to laying out objects Note You can input between 1 and 10 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Grid Color Select the grid line color Print Object Fra...

Page 582: ...Change the object to object spacing to be applied in the operation of laying out objects automatically Note You can input between 0 0 and 100 0 mm between 0 00 and 3 94 inch You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Page Setup Dialog Box This dialog box appears when you select Page Setup from the File menu This dialog box provides selections for setting the media size orientat...

Page 583: ... button Order Set the object layout order The following settings are available for order Setting Details Upper Left to Right The objects are laid out from upper left to right Upper Left to Bottom The objects are laid out from upper left to bottom Note When you have selected Roll Paper Length Auto Settings and Paper Orientation Vertical you can choose only Upper Left to Right When you have selected...

Page 584: ...mat Rotate When you place a checkmark here you can select Rotate Right or Rotate Left Setting Details Rotate Right Rotates the object 90 degrees clockwise Rotate Left Rotates the object 90 degrees counterclockwise Note When several objects are selected you cannot select Rotate Scaling You can input the value for enlargement or reduction of the obeject in numerical characters Note You can input bet...

Page 585: ...iles with the application software and repeat the above steps Laying out a Document Created with Multiple Application Programs on One Page You can lay out and print a document created with multiple application programs on one page 1 From the application software s File menu select the printer setup menu to open the Print dialog box Note Normally select Print from the File menu 2 Click on Free Layo...

Page 586: ...m while holding down the command key To select all objects select Select All from the Edit menu Changing the Object Size You can change the object size by means of mouse operation or by specifying a scaling value Note The vertical to horizontal ratio remains unchanged when the object is enlarged or reduced Resizing by means of mouse operation 1 Select an object Mac OS X Software Free Layout Select...

Page 587: ...at Dialog Box P 566 3 Use Scaling to set the magnification for enlargement or reduction You either enter numbers directly Note You can input between 25 and 400 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button 4 Click the OK button Moving an Object You can move the object position 1 Select an object Mac OS X Software Free Layout iPF8300 Moving an Object 5 569 Downloaded from ManualsPr...

Page 588: ...object 2 Select Rotate Left or Rotate Right from the toolbar Alternatively you may click on the Rotate check box in the Format Dialog Box P 566 then select Rotate Right or Rotate Left and click the OK button Note When several objects are selected you cannot select Rotate Mac OS X Software Free Layout Rotating an Object iPF8300 5 570 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 589: ...t layout order varies depending on the Order setting on the Page Setup Dialog Box P 564 Aligning Objects You can align objects systematically 1 Select multiple objects 2 Select the align menu from the Object menu Align Top Lays out the objects justifying them to the top Mac OS X Software Free Layout iPF8300 Laying out Objects Automatically 5 571 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 590: ...em to the vertical center Align Bottom Lays out the objects justifying them to the bottom Align Left Lays out the objects justifying them to the left Mac OS X Software Free Layout Aligning Objects iPF8300 5 572 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 591: ...ts justifying them to the right Changing the Object Overlapping Order You can change the object overlapping order 1 Select an object 2 Select the overlapping order menu from the Object menu Mac OS X Software Free Layout iPF8300 Changing the Object Overlapping Order 5 573 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 592: ...st position Send to Back Moves the object to the backmost position Bring Forward Moves the object one position to the front Mac OS X Software Free Layout Changing the Object Overlapping Order iPF8300 5 574 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 593: ...lternatively you may select Copy or Cut from the Edit menu 2 Click Paste from the toolbar Alternatively you may select Paste from the Edit menu Note The copied or cut object is laid out at the end of the page Mac OS X Software Free Layout iPF8300 Pasting a Copied or Cut Object 5 575 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 594: ...ment Copy are as follows Allows the document scanned with the Color imageRUNNER to be automatically enlarged and printed You can perform basic printer settings such as printer selection media type and output profile selection and matching methods in addition to borderless printing and enlargement reduction process without growing through the printer driver Note The media type image size detailed m...

Page 595: ...eRUNNER Enlargement Copy 1 Open the Utility panel of the Print dialog box Note Your printer is depicted in the lower left area of this screen Mac OS X Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iPF8300 Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy 5 577 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 596: ...ons Canon Utilities iR Enlargement Copy Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box The explanation below is on the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box Note For the step to open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box see Starting Color image RUNNER Enlargement Copy P 577 Mac OS X Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Dialog Box iPF830...

Page 597: ... select a hot folder and click this button to open the Add Edit Hot Folder dialog box that allows you to edit the hot folder Monitor Hot Folder Constantly If you click on the check box the icon of Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility will appear on the Dock when starting OS X thereafter Hot Folder Hot folder refers to a folder used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy When transferred to t...

Page 598: ...x see Starting Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy P 577 2 Click the Add button in Enlarged Copy Settings to open the Destination Selection dialog box 3 From the printer list in Destination select the printer of destination Mac OS X Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Creating a New Hot Folder iPF8300 5 580 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 599: ...the Hot Folder list 6 In Hot Folder enter the Hot Folder name 7 Click the OK button The created Hot Folder is listed in the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box Mac OS X Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iPF8300 Creating a New Hot Folder 5 581 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 600: ...nd Share files and folders using SMB to make shared settings Note You can create up to 10 hot folders Editing a Hot Folder Setting Print Conditions 1 Open the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy dialog box 2 Select the Hot Folder from the Hot Folder list 3 From Enlarged Copy Settings click Edit button to open the Add Edit Hot Folder dialog box Mac OS X Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Ed...

Page 601: ...e necessary settings in the Paper Settings Panel P 587 Mac OS X Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iPF8300 Editing a Hot Folder Setting Print Conditions 5 583 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 602: ...e necessary settings in the Output Settings Panel P 592 Mac OS X Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Editing a Hot Folder Setting Print Conditions iPF8300 5 584 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 603: ...File Sharing and click the Options button 10 Select the check box labeled Share files and folders using FTP and Share files and folders using SMB to make shared settings Note If you ve made shared settings when you created a new Hot Folder you do not need to execute steps 8 to 10 Mac OS X Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy iPF8300 Editing a Hot Folder Setting Print Conditions 5 585 Downlo...

Page 604: ... the OK button Note Select Delete files in the folder to delete only files in the hot folder Setting the Print Parameters You can set the print conditions in the setting panels within the Add Edit Hot Folder dialog box The settings available on each panel are as follows Paper Settings Panel P 587 Output Settings Panel P 592 Color Settings Panel P 594 Mac OS X Software Color imageRUNNER Enlargement...

Page 605: ...edia type that is actually set in the printer When the media you chose is different from the media set in the printer you may not receive the desired print results Paper Source You can select the paper source The following settings are available for paper source Setting Details Cut Sheet Select to print on the cut sheet Roll Paper Select to print on roll paper Mac OS X Software Color imageRUNNER E...

Page 606: ...nel takes priority None Each page is not cut after it is printed and printing continues without interruption Print Cut Guideline A print cut guideline is printed after each page and printing continues without in terruption Note Available only if rolls are selected in Paper Source Copies You can input the number of print copies in numerical characters Note The maximum value is 999 You can change th...

Page 607: ...oto Color Suitable for printing photographic images captured with a digital camera Poster The best setting for posters Prints using vivid and high impact colors Faithful Color Reproduction Prints by faithfully reproducing the colors of the original image Photo Adobe RGB Achieves the best color when printing an image created with the Adobe RGB color space feature Office Document Suitable for printi...

Page 608: ...tions Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Draft however print quality is high er Printing time is shorter and less ink is consumed with Draft than with High however print quality is lower Advanced Settings Presents detailed settings for the print priority the print quality and other items so you can select the values for these set tings yourself Print Priority Sele...

Page 609: ...ted image and printing speed The level of the print quality and resolution settings are displayed in the following combinations Setting Details Print Quality Highest High Standard Draft Resolution 600dpi 300dpi Note The availability of settings is determined by the media type and print priority selections Printing time is longer and more ink is consumed with High than with Draft however print qual...

Page 610: ...anel Displayed only if rolls are selected in Paper Source Scaling Enlarges reduces the whole page by the scaling rate as specified Input the scaling value in numerical characters You can specify a range between 5 and 600 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Although Scaling can be set to make the image larger than the media size the part that does not fit in the media can...

Page 611: ...age Select the method for rotating page The following settings are available for rotating page Setting Details Rotate Right 90 Degrees Rotates the portrait page right 90 degrees and print in landscape orientation When the rotated page can fit in the width of roll paper the page is rotated automatically and when it can not fit in the width of roll paper the page is not rotated When Fit Roll Paper W...

Page 612: ...t job Setting Details Color Enables color printing Monochrome Photo Prints monochrome photo image data in a gray scale that is free of color casting phenomenon of grays that appear tinted Monochrome Disables color printing and converts image from continuous color to grayscaled monochrome Note The availability of settings depends on the print priority and media type selections Mac OS X Software Col...

Page 613: ... ing the profile creation tool etc ColorSync P 597 Enables color matching by using the ColorSync function of Mac OS Select this if you want to perform soft proofing using ColorSync before printing No Correction No color matching is performed Select this option when you want to perform col or matching in the software application Driver Matching Mode 1 Under Matching Mode select Driver Matching Mode...

Page 614: ...o called relative colorimetric Perceptual People Dark Areas Color matching optimized for printing subdued photos such as indoor shots of people or dark scenes Along with preventing the gradation loss of dark areas you can realize photos of people in warm tones ICC Matching Mode 1 Under Matching Mode select ICC Matching Mode 2 Click Matching Method list and then select a setting Setting Details Per...

Page 615: ... matching is identical to Colorimetric Use this when you want to further reproduce the target paper material color of the image data Generally this also is called absolute colorimetric 3 Click the Input Profile list and then select an input profile Note To match the color on the printing select the input profile for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy of the Color imageRUNNER type in use 4 Click th...

Page 616: ...rgement Copy function To use Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy first complete these settings in the following order 1 Register a hot folder on your computer Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER and complete the settings for enlargement copy 2 Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER Configure the Color imageRUNNER to send s...

Page 617: ...lity pane Note Your printer is depicted in the lower left area of this screen 2 In Enlarged Copy Settings click Add or Edit and either create or modify the hot folder For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders refer to the help file for Color imageRUNNER Enlarge ment Copy Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER Configure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned origin...

Page 618: ...ission 3 Press Favorites and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder 4 Press Start on the control panel If you scan originals on the platen glass after scanning all originals press Done on the touch panel display Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the conditions you specified for the folder Mac OS X Software Color imageR...

Page 619: ...rs while Checking the Preview for Color 637 Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome 638 Adjust the Colors by Color Matching 642 Print High Quality Adobe RGB16bit Images 643 Prints monochrome photographs with high quality 645 Using Adobe CMM 645 Perform Black Point Compensation 647 Perform Printing Press Simulation Print 648 Enlarge Reduce and Print 649 Enlarge Reduce and Print ...

Page 620: ...ia type image size detailed media settings and the printer settings can cause the actual print output to differ from the Print Plug In settings the arrangement of the image in the layout preview the print start position and the media size Loss of gradation in dark areas can be reduced by performing black point compensation Note Adobe CMM is required in order to use the black point compensation fun...

Page 621: ...ive to start the installer 2 Click on the iPFxxxx PlugIn InstallerX icon in the Plug in folder in the User Software CD ROM Note The iPFxxxx icon is the name of the printer you are using 3 Input the Administrator name and password and click the OK button Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Installation Procedures 5 603 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com ...

Page 622: ... button 5 Click the Agree button 6 Select Custom Install to put a checkmark on your Print Plug In then click the Install button Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Installation Procedures iPF8300 5 604 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 623: ...In for Photoshop 1 Close Photoshop 2 In Finder display the Print Plugin for iPFxxxx folder 3 Delete the Print Plugin for iPFxxxx folder Note iPFxxxx is the name of your printer Uninstall Print Plug In for Digital Photo Professional 1 Perform the installation procedures 1 through 5 Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Uninstall Procedures 5 605 Downloaded...

Page 624: ...he Uninstall button 4 To quit another application click on the Continue button Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Uninstall Procedures iPF8300 5 606 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 625: ...he print range Note Images for use with Print Plug In are less than 60 000 pixels in width and height Reduce the selec tion range or reduce the image with processing for images more than 60 000 pixels in width and height and then attempt step 3 Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Starting from Photoshop 5 607 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 626: ... If the message below is displayed but the Print Plug In window is not displayed convert the image to RGB color or grayscale as the color space and then attempt step 3 Choose RGB color or grayscale as the color space Starting from Digital Photo Professional Follow the procedure below to start the Print Plug In from Digital Photo Professional 1 Start Digital Photo Professional 2 Open the RGB color ...

Page 627: ...essional window hereinafter referred to as the Print Plug In window is displayed Print Plug In Main Window The Print Plug In main window consists of the sheet selection area and the preview and button area Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Print Plug In Main Window 5 609 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 628: ...heet P 613 Page Setup Sheet P 617 Color Settings Sheet P 620 Print History Sheet P 621 Support Sheet P 623 Preview Area You can check the settings you made on the image in this area About the settings available on the preview area see Preview Area P 612 Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Print Plug In Main Window iPF8300 5 610 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter co...

Page 629: ...utton Click this button to close the Print Plug In window and return to application software Button Click this button to display the Print Plug In Help file Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Print Plug In Main Window 5 611 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 630: ...he print range when you drag the image while the cursor is dis played as When you click the image while the cursor is displayed as the selected area is deselected Roll Paper Preview Display the media size and roll paper information on the top in the layout printing on roll paper To select Roll Paper Preview select Roll Paper in Paper Source Print Selected Range Place a checkmark here to only print...

Page 631: ...it is not compat ible with the printer or media that you are using the color balance of the actual print product will differ Image Properties button When you click the button to open the Image Properties dialog box where Image Size Resolution Bit and Color Space information of the image imported to Print Plug In are displayed Click the Close button to return to Print Plug In Main Sheet You can use...

Page 632: ...etting Details Accuracy 300ppi This processes images at an accurate resolution This can control print speed and memory capacity High Accuracy 600ppi This processes images at a more accurate resolution This setting results in the best print quality but this takes more time to print than Accuracy 300ppi while also requiring more memory capacity This may not be displayed depending on how you set Medi...

Page 633: ...imum color conversion from the input image data color space in formation sRGB Adobe RGB media settings etc You should normally select these settings Auto Monochrome Photo Performs the best color conversion to monochrome from the input image data col or space information sRGB Adobe RGB media settings etc None No Color Correction You cannot perform color conversion with a plug in This is useful for ...

Page 634: ...CC Conversion Options button This is displayed when an ICC profile is selected as the Output Profile When this button is clicked the ICC Conversion Options dialog box is displayed allowing you to configure color conver sion related settings Refer to ICC Conversion Options dialog box P 627 for details on ICC Conversion Options Copies You can input the number of print copies in numerical characters ...

Page 635: ... sent to the printer is displayed matching the selected method in Output Image Size The following settings are available for enlarged reduced printing Setting Details Fit Paper Size This automatically enlarges reduces the entire image imported to Print Plug In to match the export media size when printing Fit Roll Paper Width This automatically enlarges reduces the entire image imported to Print Pl...

Page 636: ...lect the print position of an image on the media The following settings are available for layout Layout Setting Details Upper Left of Output Paper Size Prints the image with fitting the top left of the active print area for Paper Size Center of Output Paper Size Prints the center of the image on the center of the selected Paper Size Specify Print Start Position You can print with specifying the to...

Page 637: ...er Options button Click this button to open the Roll Paper Options dialog box where you can set roll paper width and perform auto cut settings For more information about the roll paper options see Roll Paper Options Dialog Box P 628 Size Options Click the Size Options button to open the Size Options dialog box and you can select a media name size and other settings For more information about the s...

Page 638: ...either inputting a numerical value or dragging the slide bar Note You can check the adjustments in the preview display Brightness You can adjust the brightness of the printed image without losing the brightest and darkest areas by either inputting a nu merical value or dragging the slide bar Note You can check the adjustments in the preview display Contrast You can relatively adjust the brightness...

Page 639: ...button Click the button to return all of the settings on the Color Settings sheet to their defaults Print History Sheet You can use this sheet to apply settings history used in printing and to print information such as the image file name with the image Print History and Favorites This displays a list of print preferences Select Restore Defaults and click the Apply button to restore all settings t...

Page 640: ...s the information print position Top Header Information is printed on the top of the image Bottom Footer Information is printed on the bottom of the image Print History Number Place a checkmark here to print the print history number File Name Place a checkmark here to print the file name Printed at Place a checkmark here to print the time and date Color Adjustment Value Place a checkmark here to p...

Page 641: ...button Click the button to display the printer manuals installed on the computer Note You must have User Manual installed on your computer About button Click the button to open the version information window of the Print Plug In Click the OK button in the version informa tion window to return to the Print Plug In window Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF83...

Page 642: ...line scans during printing Setting Details Printer Default The settings of the printer operating panel are applied None The printing continues to the next line immediately after the last line 1sec 3sec 5sec 7sec 9sec The printing continues to the next line after the set time For the media type that has problems such as ink smears on the page or colors that seem uneven during borderless printing et...

Page 643: ...settings of the printer operating panel are applied Use Value The calibration results are used for printing Disregard Value The calibration results are not used for printing Select this option to avoid changes to image color tones during printing due to color calibration Mirror Specify whether to print a mirror image as needed Select this option to print a version of the document or image with the...

Page 644: ...ing Details Nearest Neighbor Performs simple enlargement Bilinear Performs line vector enlargement Bicubic Adjust pixels with calculation of elements such as a color or brightness of neigh boring pixels Perform printing in the background When you place a checkmark here the plug in performs printing with the Plug In in the background Close Plug in After Printing When you place a checkmark here the ...

Page 645: ...d all of the warning dialog boxes that have been set to Do not show this screen again become dis played ICC Conversion Options dialog box This is displayed when an ICC profile is selected in the Output Profile list in the Main sheet and the ICC Conversion Options button is clicked This allows you to configure detailed color matching related settings Conversion Engine Selects the conversion engine ...

Page 646: ...to the printer Automatic Cutting You can set the printer to cut roll paper automatically or print a guideline for cutting The following settings are available for automatic cutting Setting Details Available Each page is automatically cut after it is printed None Each page is not cut after it is printed and printing continues without interruption Print Cut Guideline A print cut guideline is printed...

Page 647: ...t the units of measure to use when you define custom media size Switching this setting resets the units of measure for the entire Plug In Paper Size Width Enter the width of the media size Height Enter the height of the media size Note You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Add button Click the button to register the contents of the settings Mac OS X Software Print Plug In ...

Page 648: ...his selection cannot be changed Input Enter an input value Note The allowed entry range is 0 to 255 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Output Enter an output value Note The allowed entry range is 0 to 255 You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Curves Dialog Box iPF8300 5 630...

Page 649: ...lay Items Details Print History Number Displays the print history number File Name Displays image file name Printed at Displays time and date of printing Comment Displays comment details Note Up to 200 print history items can be displayed All items above 200 are deleted When you cannot print properly because you canceled the printing or an error occurred appears to the left of the print history nu...

Page 650: ...tings Displays the print history settings selected from the Print History or Favorites Setting Details Main When you select this the Main sheet settings are displayed Page Setup When you select this the Page Setup sheet settings are displayed Color Settings When you select this the Color Settings sheet settings are displayed Utilize Three Types of Previews You can use Print Plug In to check an ima...

Page 651: ...rint position by dragging the image When the cursor is displayed as on the preview the below conditions on the Page Setup sheet have all been met There is no checkmark in Borderless Printing There is no checkmark in Enlarged Reduced Printing or Scaling has been selected Center of Roll Paper has not been selected in Layout Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF...

Page 652: ... Image in the Preview area the Selected Range feature is enabled and you an drag the cursor on the image and select an area for printing When you click the image while the cursor is displayed as on the preview the selected area is deselec ted Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Check the original image with Image iPF8300 5 634 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com...

Page 653: ...eview in Preview Note To select Roll Paper Preview in Preview select Roll Paper in Paper Source Print with a Desired Picture Quality You can specify and print at the resolution you desire 1 Display the Main sheet Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Check Image with Roll Paper Preview 5 635 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 654: ... in Note When you select High Gradation 8bit images are processed at 8 bit channel 24 bit When you select Highest Gradation 16bit images are processed at 16bit channel 48 bit Highest Gradation 16bit will not display with some Media Type or Input Resolution to Plug in settings 5 Select the mode to be printed when processing images in Print Mode Note The settings that can be selected differ by Media...

Page 655: ...tion Warm Black for Gray Tone Enhance brightness for the curves The above image adjustments are reflected in the before and after images below Before Application After Application 1 Display the Color Settings sheet 2 Drag the slide bar in the direction of Low in Cyan Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Co...

Page 656: ...ve 7 Enter 120 in Input and 135 in Output then click the OK button 8 Click the Print button The adjustments are reflected in the image and printing begins Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome You can adjust the colors while checking the adjustments in the preview The following explanation is about the procedures for adjusting example image below Low for Contrast Mac OS X Sof...

Page 657: ...age adjustments are as below Before Application After Application 1 Open the Main sheet 2 Select Auto Monochrome Photo in Output Profile Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome 5 639 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 658: ...can change the numbers by inputting in numerical characters You can change the numbers by clicking either button or button 7 Click the Curves button then click near the center of the curve Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome iPF8300 5 640 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 659: ...ick the Print button This applies the image adjustments and starts the print job Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Adjust the Colors while Checking the Preview for Monochrome 5 641 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 660: ...le in Output Profile Note When you place a checkmark in Perform Proof in Preview you can check the color matching in the preview This may not be displayed depending on how you set Media Type The details of Output Profile you have set is saved even when you close the Print Plug In but when the specified profile cannot be located it is set to Auto Color If an ICC profile is selected as the Output Pr...

Page 661: ...sing the level of tone in the image 1 Select the Adobe RGB16bit image data in Photoshop and start Print Plug In See Starting from Photoshop P 607 2 Click button 3 Check that Adobe RGB is displayed in Color Space and 16bit channel is displayed in Bit in the Image Properties dialog box and click the Close button Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Print H...

Page 662: ...ode 8 If required adjust the colors using color matching Note For more information about the color matching see Adjust the Colors by Color Matching P 642 9 Click the Print button Printing of the Adobe RGB16bit image begins Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Print High Quality Adobe RGB16bit Images iPF8300 5 644 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 663: ...printing begins Using Adobe CMM Adobe CMM is a color conversion engine made by Adobe Using Adobe CMM makes it possible to obtain uniform color conversion results and to use the black point compensation function How to Obtain Adobe CMM Adobe CMM can be obtained using the following procedure 1 Open the Adobe website http www adobe com 2 Enter Adobe CMM in the search input box on the screen 3 Search ...

Page 664: ...rted CPU PowerPC G4 or G5 Intel Core Duo Intel Core 2 Duo Intel Xeon processor Note Check with Adobe for details How to Use Adobe CMM The procedure for using Adobe CMM is as follows 1 Display the Main sheet 2 Select one of the ICC profiles as the Output Profile 3 Click the ICC Conversion Options button Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Using Adobe CMM iPF8300...

Page 665: ...sing the following procedure Use this to avoid saturation in the black areas of images 1 Display the Main sheet 2 Select one of the ICC profiles as the Output Profile 3 Click the ICC Conversion Options button to open the ICC Conversion Options dialog box 4 Select Adobe CMM as the Conversion Engine Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Perform Black Point ...

Page 666: ...nstall Adobe CMM Perform Printing Press Simulation Print You can perform printing press simulation prints by specifying ICC profiles such as Japan Color or SWOP and specifying an ICC profile for the printing press 1 Display the Main sheet 2 Select one of the ICC profiles as the Output Profile 3 Check the Proof check box and select the profile for the printing press you want to target from the list...

Page 667: ...ng Enlarge Reduce and Print P 652 Enlarge Reduce and Print Matching Output Media Size By specifying the media type loaded in the printer the image can be enlarged or reduced to fit the size of the image area of the media This feature is useful when you need to print on the full width of Media that you have selected Note When you need to print on the full width of roll media see Enlarge Reduce and ...

Page 668: ... select Portrait the image on the media prints as it appears on the screen When you select Landscape the image on the media prints rotated 90 degrees 4 Click the Enlarged Reduced Printing check box on Note This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing 5 Select Fit Paper Size 6 Click the Print button The image prints filling the entire output media surface Mac OS X Softwar...

Page 669: ... OK button Note For more information about the Roll Paper Options dialog box see Roll Paper Options Dialog Box P 628 Click the Defaults button to return all of the roll paper option settings to their defaults 5 Select either Portrait or Landscape as the media orientation for the image in Orientation Note This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing 6 Select Fit Roll Pape...

Page 670: ...he image on the media prints as it appears on the screen When you select Landscape the image on the media prints rotated 90 degrees 4 Click the Enlarged Reduced Printing check box on Note This is not displayed when a checkmark is placed in Borderless Printing 5 Select Scaling and input the scaling factor or drag the four corners of the image in the Preview display Note You can specify scaling rate...

Page 671: ...e performed only between two edges To use the borderless printing function the specified media must be set to the printer 1 Display the Page Setup sheet 2 Select Roll Paper in Paper Source 3 Click the Borderless Printing check box on Note Select the width for roll paper set in the printer in Roll Paper Width in the Specify Roll Paper Width dialog box and click OK Mac OS X Software Print Plug In fo...

Page 672: ...per Detailed Settings Dialog Box P 624 and click the OK button Utilize Print History When you perform various settings and print in Print Plug In those settings are saved as print history Also you can export and import as files You can store often used print history under a specified name in print preferences Note You can save up to 200 print history items All items over 200 are deleted in chronol...

Page 673: ...nformation to Print with Image P 666 Confirm Print History Details You can confirm the print history details 1 Display Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button Note Select the print history you wish to check the details of from either Print History or Favorites in the Print History Details dialog box Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Confirm Pri...

Page 674: ...nd apply it to an image 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 If required check the print history details See Confirm Print History Details P 655 3 Select the print history you wish to apply from Print History and Favorites and click the Apply button Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Apply Print History to an Image iPF8300 5 656 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter c...

Page 675: ... 200 print history items to print preferences 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button 3 Select the print history you wish to store in print preferences from Print History in the Print History Details dialog box and check the print history details in Settings Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Store Print History to Print Preference...

Page 676: ...ton 5 In the Add Favorites dialog box input the name of the print history in Name input a comment in Comment and click the OK button Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Store Print History to Print Preferences iPF8300 5 658 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 677: ...delete print history Important Be aware that you cannot undo deletions of print history 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Delete Print History 5 659 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 678: ... Details dialog box and click the Delete button 4 Click the OK button 5 Click the OKbutton to close the Print History Details dialog box Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Delete Print History iPF8300 5 660 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 679: ...ry sheet 2 Click the Details button 3 Select the print history you wish to export from Favorites in the Print History Details dialog box and click the Export button Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Export Print History from Print Preferences 5 661 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 680: ... the Print History Details dialog box Import Print History to Print Preferences You can import print history in file format and store it to print preferences 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Import Print History to Print Preferences iPF8300 5 662 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 681: ...Note The print history file name suffix is pjb You cannot import a print history file exported from a different OS in Print Plug In You cannot import a print history file exported from a different printer in Print Plug In Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Import Print History to Print Preferences 5 663 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 682: ...ory store to print preferences You cannot store more than 200 print history items in print preferen ces 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Details button Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional Delete Print History from Print Preferences iPF8300 5 664 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 683: ...g box and click the Delete button 4 Click the OK button 5 Click the OK button to close the Print History Details dialog box Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Delete Print History from Print Preferences 5 665 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 684: ...ement rates and print position values When Keep Media Size is set to On on the printer a portion of bottom of the print data is not printed 1 Display the Print History sheet 2 Click the Print Information check box on 3 Select the position where you wish to print the information in Information Print Position 4 Click the information check box you wish to print on 5 When you wish to edit the comment ...

Page 685: ... box and click OK button 7 Click the Print button Comments are printed with images Mac OS X Software Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional iPF8300 Set Information to Print with Image 5 667 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 686: ...us of the hard disk and the documents saved on the hard disk Note If the status of the desired printer is not shown in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor select the printer again as follows 1 Make sure the printer is on and connected to the network or to a local port 2 In the Printer menu select the name of the desired printer After the printer is detected the printer status is shown 3 If information about...

Page 687: ...rinting of a paused print job select the print job and click the button Note Once all the print data for a print job has been sent to the printer the job can no longer be paused resumed Canceling Print Jobs Selecting a print job and clicking the button cancels printing of the selected job Note You cannot cancel other users print jobs Printing Held Jobs Printing of the job with a Status of Holding ...

Page 688: ...lace the paper in the printer with the correct paper Note To continue printing without changing the paper in the printer select the held job and click Continue to print button Mac OS X Software Printmonitor Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor iPF8300 5 670 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 689: ...nd in printer driver dialog boxes and rename them in addition to other functions You can add custom paper paper that is not Canon genuine paper or Canon feed confirmed paper to the printer con trol panel and printer driver Important Normally the Media Configuration Tool is installed and the media information is configured when you in stall the printer driver from the User Software CD ROM Use this ...

Page 690: ...om the User Software CD ROM the Media Configuration Tool is also in stalled and the media information is also configured Therefore the following procedure does not normally need to be performed To install the Media Configuration Tool without using the User Software CD ROM such as when you have downloaded a new version of the Media Configuration Tool from the Canon website use the following procedu...

Page 691: ...untry or territory then click the OK button 4 The License is displayed After you have read Canon Software License Agreement click the Continue button 5 Click the Agree button Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300 Procedures for Installing 5 673 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 692: ...ton 7 Click the Continue button to quit another application 8 When the following message is displayed click the Quit button Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Procedures for Installing iPF8300 5 674 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 693: ...PFxxxx in the folder above will be the printer name in use Procedures for Uninstalling 1 Double click the MCT Installer iPFxxxx for X icon to start the Media Configuration Tool installer Note The iPFxxxx in the icon will be the printer name in use 2 Input the administrator name and password and click the OK button Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300 Procedures for Uninstalling 5 675...

Page 694: ...ntry or territory then click the OK button 4 The License is displayed After you have read Canon Software License Agreement click the Continue button 5 Click the Agree button Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Procedures for Uninstalling iPF8300 5 676 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 695: ...7 Click the Uninstall button 8 Press the Continue button when another application is running Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300 Procedures for Uninstalling 5 677 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 696: ...Tool Follow the procedure below to start the Media Configuration Tool From the Applications menu Canon Utilities iPFxxxx Media Configuration Tool MCTxxxx app Media Configuration Tool main window is displayed Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Starting the Media Configuration Tool iPF8300 5 678 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 697: ...ich allows you to add media information files released by Canon to the printer control panel and printer driver You can also change names toggle between display ing and hiding and delete added media types You can also change the display order of Canon genuine paper and custom paper Refer to Editing Media Type Information P 680 for details on Add Genuine Paper Add Custom Paper button When this butt...

Page 698: ...equires that the user manual be installed on your comput er Editing Media Type Information Click the Add Genuine Paper button in the Media Configuration Tool main window to display the Edit Media Types dialog box This dialog box presents functions for the following tasks Adding Media Types P 681 Changing Media Names P 684 Deleting Media Types You Have Added P 686 Switching Media Types Display Show...

Page 699: ...the Status in the Media Type list To add media types download the media information file amf file in advance from the Canon website Note It may not be possible to deleting showing hiding and changing the display order under some conditions Adding Media Types Media information files amf files released by Canon are registered in the printer control panel and printer driver Important Do not perform p...

Page 700: ...lick the Browse button 3 Select the folder that contains the media information files amf files and then click the Open button Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Adding Media Types iPF8300 5 682 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 701: ...formation File is displayed as the Type of the Media Information File the me dia type display order and media type display non display settings are initialized Reconfigure these after added the master media information file 5 Click OK when the confirmation message is displayed 6 In the Edit Media Types dialog box click the Update button Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300 Adding Med...

Page 702: ...izard see Updating Media Types P 692 Important Be sure to click the Update button If you do not your changes will not be applied to the printer and printer driver Changing Media Names 1 Open the Edit Media Types dialog box Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Changing Media Names iPF8300 5 684 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 703: ...dialog box is displayed Edit the names in Name in Printer Driver and Name on Control Panel and click the OK button Note To restore the original names click the Restore button Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300 Changing Media Names 5 685 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 704: ...te Media Types wizard see Updating Media Types P 692 Important Be sure to click the Update button If you do not your changes will not be applied to the printer and printer driver Deleting Media Types You Have Added 1 Open the Edit Media Types dialog box Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Deleting Media Types You Have Added iPF8300 5 686 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 705: ...te button Note Only paper for which Status in the Media Type is Add can be deleted 3 In the Edit Media Types dialog box click the Update button Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300 Deleting Media Types You Have Added 5 687 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 706: ...Media Types P 692 Important Be sure to click the Update button If you do not your changes will not be applied to the printer and printer driver Switching Media Types Display Show Hide 1 Open the Edit Media Types dialog box Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Switching Media Types Display Show Hide iPF8300 5 688 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 707: ...the Media Type list Each time you click the Show Hide button the display mode cycles from showing both the printer driver and printer panel to hiding both the printer driver and printer panel and then to showing only the printer panel 3 In the Edit Media Types dialog box click the Update button Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300 Switching Media Types Display Show Hide 5 689 Downloa...

Page 708: ...dia Types P 692 Important Be sure to click the Update button If you do not your changes will not be applied to the printer and printer driver Changing the Display Order of Media Types 1 Open the Edit Media Types dialog box Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Changing the Display Order of Media Types iPF8300 5 690 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 709: ...tton The Update Media Types wizard is started at this point For details on the procedure to update paper information using the Update Media Types wizard see Updating Media Types P 692 Important Be sure to click the Update button If you do not your changes will not be applied to the printer and printer driver Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300 Changing the Display Order of Media Typ...

Page 710: ...e as follows Important When you update the media type information perform the same update on all of the PCs that are using that printer 1 Confirm the printer where media type information is to be updated to be displayed in Printer in the Update Media Types Select Printer dialog box and then click the Next button 2 Communication with the printer starts and the following dialog box is displayed Mac ...

Page 711: ...irm Update Confirm the information received from the printer To update click the Execute button Important When setting a data to the printer that differs from the data to be updated the selected media informa tion file is updated When you would like to remain the data that is set to the printer click the Cancel button 4 Communication with the printer starts and the following dialog box is displaye...

Page 712: ...pdate button Select the printer that you want to update in Step 1 and update the media information by following the Update Media Types wizard Using Paper Other Than Genuine Paper Feed Confirmed Paper When the Add Custom Paper button is clicked in the Media Configuration Tool main window the Add Custom Paper dialog box is displayed Adding custom paper to the printer control panel and printer driver...

Page 713: ...feed confirmed paper cannot be changed from this dialog box Refer to Editing Media Type Information P 680 Changing the display order of media types displayed in the printer control panel and printer driver is per formed from the Edit Media Types dialog box regardless of whether it is Canon genuine paper or custom paper Refer to Editing Media Type Information P 680 Compatible Paper Paper specificat...

Page 714: ...paper that is not Canon genuine paper or Canon feed confirmed paper Add Custom Paper In order to add new custom paper to the printer control panel and printer driver first select the media type to use as the basis from among the Canon genuine paper and feed confirmed paper Add this as custom paper after making various changes to the standard paper as necessary Important Do not execute printing on ...

Page 715: ...The Step 1 Select the standard paper dialog box is displayed In Paper Category select the category of media type to use as the basis of the custom paper you are adding Important Select the category that you think is the closest to the custom paper you are adding Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300 Add Custom Paper 5 697 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 716: ...t the media type called General from among the displayed Media Type Name Depending on the selected category there might not be a media type called General Depending on the selected category the Assist button may be disabled 5 The Step 2 Set the custom paper name dialog box is displayed Enter an arbitrary name to display in the printer control panel and printer driver and then click the Next button...

Page 717: ...utton Important Check that there is no paper left on the ejection guide If Paper Feed Adjustment is not executed horizontal stripes with different color tones may appear in the printed material Paper feed adjustment does not need to be executed more than once Execute paper feed adjustment only once each time you add a custom paper 9 The Roll Paper Settings dialog box is displayed Note If a paper s...

Page 718: ...e ink to dry User Cut Cutting is not performed by the cutter unit Cut the roll paper using scissors after each sheet Select this for paper that cannot be cut by the cutter unit Drying Time Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry as needed Off Ejects immediately after printing finishes 30 sec 1 min 3 min 5 min 10 min 30 min 60 min Ejects after the speci fied time has elapsed after pr...

Page 719: ...r set the Automatic Cutting Settings to User Cut and cut the roll paper using scissors etc Paper where borderless printing can be performed is limited by the media type and roll paper width Refer to Compatible Paper P 695 For custom paper where there is a need to set the Automatic Cutting Settings to User Cut set the Borderless Printing to Deny 10 The Step 5 Configure the amount of ink used dialog...

Page 720: ...test print using Maximum ink usage and the image to use using Image used in test print and then click the Start Print button 12 Determine and set the ink level that is thought to give the best visual test print results with no bleeding or scraping of ink Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Add Custom Paper iPF8300 5 702 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 721: ...t that ICC color profile in your soft ware Depending on the maximum ink usage setting some of the print qualities in the printer driver may become unselectable 13 Configure Head Height and Vacuum Strength as required and click the Next button Usually these do not need to be set Important If you set the Head Height lower than the automatically set height in parentheses check that the printhead does...

Page 722: ...on 15 The Confirm Update dialog box is displayed Confirm the updates and then click the Execute button Note If the authentication screen is displayed input the administrator name and passowrd and click the OK button Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Add Custom Paper iPF8300 5 704 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 723: ...custom paper is displayed in the Edit Media Types dialog box that is opened by Add Genuine Paper in the Media Configuration Tool window Delete Custom Paper You can delete custom paper that you have already added from printer control panel and from the printer driver of the PC you are using 1 Open the Add Custom Paper dialog box 2 Select the paper you want to delete from the Added Custom Paper list...

Page 724: ...ecute button Note If the authentication screen is displayed input the administrator name and passowrd and click the OK button The custom paper is deleted from the control panel of the printer and from the printer driver of the PC you are using Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Delete Custom Paper iPF8300 5 706 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 725: ...fer to Steps 5 to 15 of the Add Custom Paper P 696 for details on how to configure each setting Export Custom Media Information You can export to file and save media information about custom paper that you have added The saved Custom Media Information File can be used by importing it into another printer or PC Refer to Import Custom Media Information P 709 for details on importing custom media inf...

Page 726: ...aper list and then click the Export button 3 Specify the location to save the Custom Media Information File A Custom Media Information File am1 file is saved Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Export Custom Media Information iPF8300 5 708 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 727: ...le to the printer control panel and to the printer driver of the PC you are using 1 Open the Add Custom Paper dialog box 2 Click the Import button 3 Select the printer to add the custom paper to Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool iPF8300 Import Custom Media Information 5 709 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 728: ...ormation File am1 file to import 5 The Confirm Update dialog box opens Click the Execute button Note If the authentication screen is displayed input the administrator name and passowrd and click the OK button Mac OS X Software Media Configuration Tool Import Custom Media Information iPF8300 5 710 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 729: ...bing against the paper configure the Vacuum Strength in the Step 5 Configure the amount of ink used dialog box as follows For paper based media such as Heavyweight Coated Paper Set to Strong or Strongest For film based media such as CAD Tracing Paper Set to Standard Strong or Strongest For thin paper of thickness 0 1mm or less Set to Weakest Note If the printhead still rubs even after changing the...

Page 730: ...anding in different colors occurs in Troubleshooting See Banding in different colors occurs P 1061 If you cannot obtain sufficiently high print quality change the maximum ink usage or change the media type used as the basis for the custom paper in the Step 1 Select the standard paper dialog box If there is no luster in printed material set the paper used as the basis for the custom paper to a pape...

Page 731: ...Print Jobs Basic Print Job Operations 714 Advanced Print Job Operations 741 Print Jobs iPF8300 6 713 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 732: ...out the need to use a computer again Simplify reprinting if any errors occur If errors occur in the middle of printing as when paper runs out you can resume printing after clearing the error with out resending the print job from a computer Streamline printing work Without using a computer you can select print jobs and print in the desired quantity You can also select multiple print jobs to print d...

Page 733: ...the shared mailbox Up to 100 print jobs can be saved here but they will be deleted one after another starting with the oldest job in the following situations If there are more than 100 jobs queued and saved in the shared mailbox combined If no more temporary storage space is available when jobs for which you have selected Print in Output Method in Windows or Send job to in Mac OS X are received If...

Page 734: ...gital Photo Professional P 300 Free Layout P 255 Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy P 285 Preview P 242 Mac OS Print Plug In for Photoshop Digital Photo Professional P 601 Free Layout P 542 Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy P 576 Preview P 511 The document title will be imagePROGRAF when you print from imagePROGRAF Preview Print Jobs Basic Print Job Operations Saving Print Jobs on the Printer Har...

Page 735: ...indows 1 Access the Page Setup sheet 2 Click Output Method to display the Output Method dialog box Print Jobs Basic Print Job Operations iPF8300 Saving Print Jobs on the Printer Hard Disk 6 717 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 736: ...rsonal box names in the Mail box list as acquired from the printer 4 In Name of data to be saved specify how to name saved print jobs To use the file name choose Use file name Otherwise choose Enter name and enter a name in Name 5 Click OK to close the Output Method dialog box Configuring the printer driver in Mac OS 1 Access the Additional Settings pane 2 Make your selection in Send job to Print ...

Page 737: ...s hard disk before print ing Managing the Job Queue Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs Print jobs being processed by the printer are collectively called the job queue You can delete or preempt jobs in the job queue as needed These operations are available from the Control Panel or in RemoteUI imagePROGRAF Status Monitor and imagePROG RAF Printmonitor Delete Note that only jobs that are not currentl...

Page 738: ...button 2 Press the OK button The Job Menu is displayed 3 Manage the job queue as needed Deleting jobs 1 Press or to select Print Job and then press the OK button 2 Press or to select the print job to delete and then press the OK button 3 Press or to select Delete and then press the OK button Preempting other jobs 1 Press or to select Print Job and then press the OK button 2 Press or to select the ...

Page 739: ...ils refer to the RemoteUI help file Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor Windows Manage jobs as needed on the Job sheet For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Print Jobs Basic Print Job Operations iPF8300 Managing the Job Queue Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs 6 721 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 740: ...Status Monitor and imagePROG RAF Printmonitor Note As long as you do not manage held jobs from the Control Panel imagePROGRAF Status Monitor or image PROGRAF Printmonitor they will remain in the job queue In this case the printer processes the next job in the queue without pausing To print held jobs replace the loaded paper with the paper specified in the print job See Loading Rolls in the Printer...

Page 741: ...on 5 Press or to select Print Anyway or Delete and then press the OK button If you choose Print Anyway Press or to select Yes or No and then press the OK button If you choose Delete Press or to select Yes or No and then press the OK button Using RemoteUI Manage jobs as needed on the Print Job page For details refer to the RemoteUI help file Print Jobs Basic Print Job Operations iPF8300 Managing Pe...

Page 742: ...GRAF Status Monitor P 420 Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Manage jobs as needed on the Driver sheet For details see Job Management Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor P 669 Print Jobs Basic Print Job Operations Managing Pending Jobs Printing or Deleting Jobs on Hold iPF8300 6 724 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 743: ...the OK button The Job Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Stored Job and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select the box number in the range 00 29 and then press the OK button Note Enter a password if one has been set and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select Job List and then press the OK button 6 Press or to select the saved job and then press the OK button 7 Press or to select ...

Page 744: ...tored Job page choose the box Note Enter a password if one has been set 2 Select the print job and click Resume Print Jobs Basic Print Job Operations Printing Saved Jobs iPF8300 6 726 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 745: ... Copies and click OK For details refer to the RemoteUI help file Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor 1 On the Hard Disk sheet select a box and click Open Print Jobs Basic Print Job Operations iPF8300 Printing Saved Jobs 6 727 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 746: ...e Documents dialog box select the print job and click Print 3 In the Print dialog box enter the quantity to print in Copies and click OK Print Jobs Basic Print Job Operations Printing Saved Jobs iPF8300 6 728 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 747: ...one copy during the previous print job multiplied by the number of copies For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor 1 On the Hard Disk pane click by Inbox No Name Note Enter a password if one has been set The password is a four digit number Print Jobs Basic Print Job Operations iPF8300 Printing Saved Jobs 6 729 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com...

Page 748: ... In the Resume Printing dialog box enter the quantity to print and click OK For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file Print Jobs Basic Print Job Operations Printing Saved Jobs iPF8300 6 730 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 749: ... OK button The Job Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Stored Job and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select the box number in the range 00 29 and then press the OK button Note Enter a password if one has been set and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select Job List and then press the OK button 6 Press or to select the saved job and then press the OK button 7 Press or to select Del...

Page 750: ...e mail box Note Enter a password if one has been set 2 Select the print job and click Delete For details refer to the RemoteUI help file Print Jobs Basic Print Job Operations Deleting Saved Jobs iPF8300 6 732 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 751: ...atus Monitor 1 On the Hard Disk sheet select a box and click Open Note Enter a password if one has been set Print Jobs Basic Print Job Operations iPF8300 Deleting Saved Jobs 6 733 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 752: ...ete For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor 1 In the Hard Disk pane click next to Inbox No Name Print Jobs Basic Print Job Operations Deleting Saved Jobs iPF8300 6 734 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 753: ...obs Print jobs stored on the printer s hard disk saved jobs can be moved from the current box to another box as follows However jobs saved in personal boxes cannot be moved to the shared mailbox This operation is available in RemoteUI imagePROGRAF Status Monitor and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Print Jobs Basic Print Job Operations iPF8300 Moving Saved Jobs 6 735 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Ma...

Page 754: ...em from the shared mailbox to personal boxes See Using the Printer Hard Disk P 714 Using RemoteUI 1 On the Stored Job page choose the box Note Enter a password if one has been set 2 Select the print job and click Move Document Print Jobs Basic Print Job Operations Moving Saved Jobs iPF8300 6 736 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 755: ...e Destination mail box list and click OK For details refer to the RemoteUI help file Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor Windows 1 On the Hard Disk sheet select a box and click Open Print Jobs Basic Print Job Operations iPF8300 Moving Saved Jobs 6 737 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 756: ... the Documents dialog box select the print job and click Move 3 In the Move dialog box select the destination personal box and click OK Print Jobs Basic Print Job Operations Moving Saved Jobs iPF8300 6 738 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 757: ...ePROGRAF Printmonitor Macintosh 1 In the Hard Disk pane click next to Inbox No Name Note Enter a password if one has been set The password is a four digit number Print Jobs Basic Print Job Operations iPF8300 Moving Saved Jobs 6 739 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 758: ... Move Document dialog box select the destination personal box and click OK For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file Print Jobs Basic Print Job Operations Moving Saved Jobs iPF8300 6 740 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 759: ...portant Contact the software or system developer for information about support for this printer function Specifying Output Method In Output Method specify how to manage jobs regarding printing and saving them Print Save print jobs automatically at the same time they are printed This is the default format Print Auto Del Save print jobs temporarily at the same time they are printed and delete them a...

Page 760: ...start when Print After Recv is set to On even if you have selected Save Box 01 in Output Method 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Settings Adj tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select System Setup and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select Print...

Page 761: ... OK button 4 Press or to select Common Box Set and then press the OK button Note If a password has been set on the printer the Logon screen is displayed To change the setting select Administrator and press the OK button Enter the password when Ad min Pswd is displayed and press the OK button before going to the next procedure If you select User and press the OK button you can check settings values...

Page 762: ...I 1 On the Stored Job page choose the personal box 2 Click Edit 3 In the Set Register User s Inbox dialog box specify the password and click OK Set Password Select the check box Password Enter the password This field is limited to four digits in the range 0001 9999 Confirmation Number Re enter the password to confirm it For details refer to the RemoteUI help Print Jobs Advanced Print Job Operation...

Page 763: ...ttings dialog box specify the password and click OK Set password Select the check box Password Enter the password This field is limited to four digits in the range 0001 9999 Re enter to confirm Re enter the password to confirm it Print Jobs Advanced Print Job Operations iPF8300 Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes 6 745 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 764: ...ist and click Set 2 In the Settings dialog box specify the password and click OK Set password Select the check box Password Enter the password This field is limited to four digits in the range 0001 9999 Verify Re enter the password to confirm it Print Jobs Advanced Print Job Operations Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes iPF8300 6 746 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 765: ...an assign names to personal boxes This operation is available in RemoteUI imagePROGRAF Status Monitor and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Using RemoteUI 1 On the Stored Job page choose the personal box Print Jobs Advanced Print Job Operations iPF8300 Naming Personal Boxes 6 747 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 766: ...2 Click Edit 3 In the Set Register User s Inbox dialog box enter the name in Inbox Name and click OK For details refer to the RemoteUI help file Print Jobs Advanced Print Job Operations Naming Personal Boxes iPF8300 6 748 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 767: ... On the Hard Disk sheet select the personal box and click Open Note Enter a password if one has been set for the personal box Print Jobs Advanced Print Job Operations iPF8300 Naming Personal Boxes 6 749 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 768: ...ngs 3 In the Settings dialog box enter the name and click OK For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Print Jobs Advanced Print Job Operations Naming Personal Boxes iPF8300 6 750 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 769: ...lick next to Inbox No Name Select a saved job in the list and click Set Note Enter a password if one has been set The password is a four digit number Print Jobs Advanced Print Job Operations iPF8300 Naming Personal Boxes 6 751 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 770: ...l or in RemoteUI imagePROGRAF Status Monitor and imagePROG RAF Printmonitor Using the Control Panel 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Job tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Job Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Stored Job and then press the OK button Print Jobs Advanced Print Job Operati...

Page 771: ...press the OK button 5 Press or to select Job List and then press the OK button Using RemoteUI On the Stored Job page choose the box Note Enter a password if one has been set Jobs saved in the box are listed Print Jobs Advanced Print Job Operations iPF8300 Displaying a List of Saved Jobs 6 753 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 772: ...ROGRAF Status Monitor Windows On the Hard Disk sheet select a box and click Open Note Enter a password if one has been set Print Jobs Advanced Print Job Operations Displaying a List of Saved Jobs iPF8300 6 754 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 773: ...tails refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Macintosh On the Hard Disk pane click by Inbox No Name Print Jobs Advanced Print Job Operations iPF8300 Displaying a List of Saved Jobs 6 755 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 774: ... the Job tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Job Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Stored Job and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select the box number in the range 00 29 and then press the OK button Note Enter a password if one has been set and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select Print Job List and then press ...

Page 775: ...available in RemoteUI imagePROGRAF Status Monitor and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Using RemoteUI 1 On the Stored Job page choose the box Note Enter a password if one has been set 2 Select the print job and click Details Print Jobs Advanced Print Job Operations iPF8300 Displaying Details of Saved Jobs 6 757 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 776: ...ils refer to the RemoteUI help file Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor Windows 1 On the Hard Disk sheet select a box and click Open Print Jobs Advanced Print Job Operations Displaying Details of Saved Jobs iPF8300 6 758 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 777: ...select the print job and click Properties The Properties dialog box is displayed For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Print Jobs Advanced Print Job Operations iPF8300 Displaying Details of Saved Jobs 6 759 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 778: ...nbox No Name Note Enter a password if one has been set The password is a four digit number For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file Print Jobs Advanced Print Job Operations Displaying Details of Saved Jobs iPF8300 6 760 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 779: ...le in RemoteUI imagePROGRAF Status Monitor and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Using RemoteUI 1 On the Stored Job page choose the box Note Enter a password if one has been set 2 Select the print job and click Details Print Jobs Advanced Print Job Operations iPF8300 Renaming Saved Jobs 6 761 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 780: ...k Change Document 4 In the Rename Saved Document dialog box enter the name and click OK For details refer to the RemoteUI help file Print Jobs Advanced Print Job Operations Renaming Saved Jobs iPF8300 6 762 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 781: ...Monitor Windows 1 On the Hard Disk sheet select a box and click Open Note Enter a password if one has been set Print Jobs Advanced Print Job Operations iPF8300 Renaming Saved Jobs 6 763 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 782: ...ick Properties 3 In the Properties dialog box enter the new name and click OK For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Print Jobs Advanced Print Job Operations Renaming Saved Jobs iPF8300 6 764 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 783: ...In the Hard Disk pane click next to Inbox No Name Note Enter a password if one has been set The password is a four digit number Print Jobs Advanced Print Job Operations iPF8300 Renaming Saved Jobs 6 765 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 784: ...3 In the Settings dialog box enter the new name and click OK For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help file Print Jobs Advanced Print Job Operations Renaming Saved Jobs iPF8300 6 766 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 785: ...Handling Paper Paper 768 Handling rolls 774 Handling sheets 802 Output Stacker 812 Media take up unit 821 Handling Paper iPF8300 7 767 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 786: ... on the printer Control Panel and in the printer driver is up to date You can use the Media Configuration Tool to add custom paper paper that is not Canon genuine paper or Canon feed con firmed paper to the printer control panel and the printer driver Accessing the Paper Reference Guide from imagePROGRAF Support Information The Paper Reference Guide can also be accessed from imagePROGRAF Support I...

Page 787: ...e iPF Support icon in the Dock The imagePROGRAF Support Information window is displayed 2 Click the Paper Reference Guide button The Paper Reference Guide is displayed Handling Paper Paper iPF8300 Types of Paper 7 769 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 788: ...edia Configuration Tool to update information about paper the types of paper on the printer Control Panel in the printer driver and in related software are updated Windows 1 Double click the iPFxxxx Support desktop icon iPFxxxx indicates the printer model The imagePROGRAF Support Information window is displayed 2 Click Visit the imagePROGRAF webpage The default browser on your computer is started ...

Page 789: ...e even within the warranty period Paper Sizes Rolls Rolls that meet the following conditions are supported Outer diameter Up to 150 mm 6 in Inner diameter of paper core 2 or 3 inches Printing side out Roll Width Roll Paper Width Setting in Printer Driver Borderless Printing 1 P 772 1117 6 mm 44 00 in 44 in Roll 1117 6mm Yes 1066 8 mm 42 00 in 42 in Roll 1066 8mm Yes 1030 0 mm 40 55 in JIS B0 B1 Ro...

Page 790: ... in ISO A3 329 0 483 0 mm 12 95 19 02 in ISO A4 210 0 297 0 mm 8 27 11 69 in ISO B0 1000 0 1414 0 mm 39 37 55 67 in ISO B1 707 0 1000 0 mm 27 83 39 37 in ISO B2 500 0 707 0 mm 19 69 27 83 in ISO B3 353 0 500 0 mm 13 90 19 69 in ISO B4 250 0 353 0 mm 9 84 13 90 in JIS B0 1030 0 1456 0 mm 40 55 57 32 in JIS B1 728 0 1030 0 mm 28 66 40 55 in JIS B2 515 0 728 0 mm 20 28 28 66 in JIS B3 364 0 515 0 mm ...

Page 791: ...7 355 6 431 8 mm 14 00 17 00 in 12 x16 304 8 406 4 mm 12 00 16 00 in 10 x12 254 0 304 8 mm 10 00 12 00 in 10 x15 254 0 381 0 mm 10 00 15 00 in 8 x10 203 2 254 0 mm 8 00 10 00 in US Photo 16 x20 406 4 508 0 mm 16 00 20 00 in Poster 20 x30 508 0 762 0 mm 20 00 30 00 in Poster 30 x40 762 0 1016 0 mm 30 00 40 00 in Poster 42 x60 1066 8 1524 0 mm 42 00 60 00 in Poster 44 x62 1117 6 1574 8 mm 44 00 62 0...

Page 792: ...rinting on rolls attach the Roll Holder to the roll Rolls have a two or three inch paper core Use the correct attachment for the paper core The printer comes equipped with the 2 Inch Paper Core Attachment installed Using Rolls with a 2 inch Paper Core Using Rolls with a 3 inch Paper Core Roll Holder Side Holder Stopper Side Roll Holder Side Holder Stopper Side No Attach ment Nee ded 2 Inch Paper C...

Page 793: ...oll Align the edges of the paper on both ends of the roll Misalignment may cause feeding problems Note For details on supported sizes and types of rolls see Paper Sizes or the Paper Reference Guide See Paper Sizes P 771 See Types of Paper P 768 To view instructions as you attach the Roll Holder press the Navigate button See How to View Instruc tions With Navigate P 899 1 Lift the Holder Stopper le...

Page 794: ...er and insert it firmly No attachment is needed Using rolls with a 3 inch paper core Holder Stopper Side Roll Holder Side Align the tips a of 3 Inch Paper Core Attachment 2 with the holes b of the Holder Stopper and insert it firmly Align the tips a of 3 Inch Paper Core Attachment 1 with the holes b of the Roll Holder and insert it firmly Handling Paper Handling rolls Attaching the Roll Holder to ...

Page 795: ...ush it firmly in until the flange a of the Holder Stopper touches the roll Lock the Holder Stopper lever c by pushing it down toward the shaft side Loading Rolls in the Printer Follow these steps to load rolls in the printer Important Always load rolls when the printer is on If the printer is off when you load a roll the paper may not be advanced correctly when you turn the printer on Handling Pap...

Page 796: ...button 2 Press or to select Roll Paper and then press the OK button Note If any paper has been advanced that will not be used a message is shown requesting you to remove it Press or to select Yes and then press the OK button Remove the paper and go to the next step 3 Open the Top Cover and lift the Ejection Guide Handling Paper Handling rolls Loading Rolls in the Printer iPF8300 7 778 Downloaded f...

Page 797: ...ves b on both ends of the Roll Holder Slot fully into the slot Caution Be careful not to drop the roll and hurt yourself when loading it Be careful not to pinch your fingers between the Roll Holder shaft a and the guide grooves b when loading rolls Handling Paper Handling rolls iPF8300 Loading Rolls in the Printer 7 779 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 798: ...urface of roll paper as you insert it in the slot This may affect the printing quality If the paper is wrinkled or warped straighten it out before loading it For paper that tends to curl lift the Release Lever and manually pull the roll paper over the Platen Load the roll so that there is no gap between the right edge of the paper and the Roll Holder Handling Paper Handling rolls Loading Rolls in ...

Page 799: ...6 Lower the Ejection Guide 7 Holding the edge of the roll paper lift the Release Lever Handling Paper Handling rolls iPF8300 Loading Rolls in the Printer 7 781 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 800: ...ainst the Printhead Do not force the roll paper into alignment with the paper alignment line b This may prevent the paper from being advanced straight Note You can adjust the strength of suction holding paper against the Platen when the Release Lever is released If it is difficult to load paper press the or button on the Control Panel to adjust the strength Set suction stronger by pressing the but...

Page 801: ...the type and length of the paper Not prin ted A menu for selection of the paper type and length is automatically shown on the Display Screen Press or to select the type and length of paper loaded and then press the OK button Note For details on types of paper to select see the Paper Reference Guide See Types of Paper P 768 Adjusting the printhead alignment with the type of paper to be used in prin...

Page 802: ...ction of the type of paper on the Display Screen Select the type of paper and press the OK button If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have set ManageRemainRoll to On specify the roll length after the type of paper See Specifying the Paper Length P 785 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Paper tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed...

Page 803: ...efore loading a sheet the media type setting is updated to match the type of paper specified by the print job When you have selected ManageRemainRoll On on the Control Panel and a barcode is printed on the roll the media type setting is updated to match the type of paper specified by the barcode To change the media type setting see Changing the Type of Paper P 784 Specifying the Paper Length When ...

Page 804: ...tton to enter the value 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to finish entering the value and then press the OK button Removing the Roll from the Printer Remove rolls from the printer as follows Note If you need to cut the roll see Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls P 794 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Paper tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed pr...

Page 805: ...move the roll before the barcode is printed You will be unable to keep track of the amount of roll paper left See Keeping Track of the Amount of Roll Paper Left P 791 5 Open the Top Cover and lift the Ejection Guide 6 Using both hands rotate the Roll Holder in the direction of the arrow to rewind the roll Handling Paper Handling rolls iPF8300 Removing the Roll from the Printer 7 787 Downloaded fro...

Page 806: ... from Rolls P 789 8 Lower the Ejection Guide and close the Top Cover Note To load new paper in the printer at this point see Loading Rolls in the Printer P 777 Clean inside the top cover before loading paper See Cleaning Inside the Top Cover P 1026 Handling Paper Handling rolls Removing the Roll from the Printer iPF8300 7 788 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 807: ...position indica ted b remove it from the Roll Holder 2 Remove the Roll Holder from the roll 3 When removing attachments push the tips a in as you remove the attachment 3 Inch Paper Core Attachment 1 Roll Holder side Handling Paper Handling rolls iPF8300 Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls 7 789 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 808: ...ed which may affect the printing quality when you use it again Feeding Roll Paper Manually After a roll has been advanced you can press the Feed button to feed or retract the roll with the and buttons 1 Press the Feed button 2 Press the or button to advance or retract the roll Press to retract the roll manually Press to advance the roll manually Handling Paper Handling rolls Feeding Roll Paper Man...

Page 809: ...rcodes the type of paper and amount left are automatically detected after rolls are loaded The barcode will be cut off after it has been read Important If the barcode on the roll is not detected enter the type and length of paper on the Control Panel Follow these steps to set ManageRemainRoll to On as follows 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Paper tab Note ...

Page 810: ...face during ejection soiling it You can prevent problems by adjusting the drying time after printing before the paper is cut Windows 1 Display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu Windows P 207 2 Select the Main sheet and click CAdvanced Settings in AMedia Type Handling Paper Handling rolls Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls...

Page 811: ...Scans in ADrying Time and then click OK See Paper Detailed Settings Dialog Box Windows P 213 Mac OS X 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the Main pane and click CSettings in AMedia Type Handling Paper Handling rolls iPF8300 Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls 7 793 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 812: ...t ic The roll is automatically cut by the Cutter Unit following printer driver settings Media Menu Paper Details Various Types of Paper Cutting Mode Automat ic Auto Cut See Cutting Roll Pa per After Print ing P 190 Yes Eject P 795 Choose this setting if you prefer not to have documents dropped immediately after printing as when waiting for ink to dry To cut the roll with the Cutter Unit press the ...

Page 813: ... for some types of paper For this paper we recommend keep ing the preset cutting mode If documents printed using Automatic Eject or manual cutting are short rolls are advanced a specific amount before cutting to prevent problems with cutting and paper ejection This may create a wider bottom margin in some cases Cut rolls manually in the following cases Eject waiting for ink to dry after printing I...

Page 814: ...elect Cutting Mode and then press the OK button 6 Press or to select Eject and then press the OK button 7 Print the job When printing is finished the printer will stop without cutting 8 Holding the printed document to prevent it from dropping press the Cut button to cut the roll Manual when using media that cannot be cut with the Cutter Unit Handling Paper Handling rolls Specifying the Cutting Met...

Page 815: ... or to select the type of paper and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select Cutting Mode and then press the OK button 6 Press or to select Manual and then press the OK button 7 Print the job The printer stops advancing the paper after printing 8 Press the Feed button Roll paper is fed to the specified cut position and then automatically stopped Handling Paper Handling rolls iPF8300 Specifyin...

Page 816: ...OK button After the roll is rewound it stops automatically Paper cutting to have the roll cut at your specified position 1 Press the Feed button Handling Paper Handling rolls Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls iPF8300 7 798 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 817: ...ding edge to make the edge straight after you load a roll Trim Edge First offers the following options Automatic If the left and right side of the leading edge of the roll a and b are uneven by 40 mm 1 6 in or more when you load the roll the edge is cut an amount relative to the slant to ensure a straight edge and scraps are removed The edge is not cut if the unevenness is less than 40 mm However ...

Page 818: ...ote that paper jams or Platen soiling may occur Follow these steps to change the Trim Edge First setting 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Paper tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Paper Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Paper Details and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select the ...

Page 819: ... jams Borderless printing is not available when CutDustReduct is set to On To use borderless printing select CutDustReduct Off Set CutDustReduct to On as follows 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Paper tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Paper Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Paper Detai...

Page 820: ... and around the Ejection Guide If these areas are dirty we recommend cleaning them in advance See Cleaning Inside the Top Cover P 1026 Store unused paper in the original package away from high temperature humidity and direct sunlight Paper that is wrinkled or warped may jam If necessary straighten the paper and reload it Load the paper straight Loading paper askew will cause an error 1 Select shee...

Page 821: ...en advanced that will not be used a message is shown requesting you to remove it Press or to select Yes and then press the OK button Remove the paper and go to the next step 2 Lift the Release Lever and open the Top Cover Handling Paper Handling sheets iPF8300 Loading Sheets in the Printer 7 803 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 822: ...aten a and the Paper Retainer b Align the edges of the sheet as follows 1 Align the sheet with the Paper Alignment Line c at right 2 Align the inserted edge of the sheet with the leading edge of the Paper Alignment Line d as shown Handling Paper Handling sheets Loading Sheets in the Printer iPF8300 7 804 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 823: ...le However even if you increase the suction it may not be sufficient to hold some types of paper against the Platen well In this case use your hand to load the paper Sheets are held in place by suction through holes on the Platen Although the suction may produce a noise when paper is loaded in some positions it does not indicate a problem If the noise is distract ing try moving the paper over slig...

Page 824: ...to select see the Paper Reference Guide See Types of Paper P 768 When using the Output Stacker if you will print on large stiff sheets we recommend adjusting the Output Stacker into the lowest position to prevent printed sheets from being bent See Using the Output Stacker P 813 Printing From a Desired Starting Point Print on sheets from a desired starting point as follows Set Width Detection to Of...

Page 825: ... print job in advance a menu for selection of the type of paper is displayed Press or to select the type of paper and then press the OK button Note If a print job was received before paper was advanced the media type and size specified by the job are shown on the Display Screen Thus this screen is not displayed Go to step 2 2 Width Detection OFF OK to continue is now shown on the Display Screen Pr...

Page 826: ...from the current position close the Top Cover To reposition the paper lift the Release Lever Handling Paper Handling sheets Printing From a Desired Starting Point iPF8300 7 808 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 827: ...nment line a on the right side of the printer and the position from which to start printing aligned with the groove b at the far end of the platen load the paper Handling Paper Handling sheets iPF8300 Printing From a Desired Starting Point 7 809 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 828: ... Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Paper Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Eject Paper and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select Yes and then press the OK button The paper is ejected from the front of the printer Handling Paper Handling sheets Removing Sheets iPF8300 7 810 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 829: ...he Top Cover lift the Release Lever and remove the sheet 6 Lower the Release Lever and close the Top Cover Handling Paper Handling sheets iPF8300 Removing Sheets 7 811 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 830: ...ut Stacker 819 Output Stacker a Output Stacker A cloth tray that catches ejected documents b White tag A point of reference for attaching the Output Stacker in the right direction Handling Paper Output Stacker Output Stacker iPF8300 7 812 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 831: ...r securely in specific positions e Basket Rod Keeps Basket Arm R and Basket Arm L at the same angle f Rod Holder Holds the middle of the Basket Rod cord side See Using the Output Stacker P 813 Using the Output Stacker The Output Stacker can be held at four positions as shown When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker Use position 1 Handling Paper Output Stacker iPF8300 Using the Output S...

Page 832: ... If you do not printed documents may not be dropped into the Output Stacker and the printed surface may become soiled The Output Stacker can hold one sheet When printing multiple pages remove each sheet after it is printed Before using the Output Stacker remove the Rewind Spool If you do not it may prevent printed documents from being held correctly and they may be scratched The Output Stacker can...

Page 833: ...te paper or paper that curls easily Depending on the type of paper the edge may curl or bend during ejection In this case straighten out the paper If the paper is curled or bent it may damage printed documents Some types of paper may get caught between the Ejection Guide and Output Stacker during ejection In this case free the paper from where it is caught If the paper is caught it may damage prin...

Page 834: ...er Remove the front Basket Rod from the left and right basket arms and remove the back Basket Rod and black cord from the Rod Holder Handling Paper Output Stacker Using the Output Stacker iPF8300 7 816 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 835: ...er still attached remove the Rod Holder Adapter and put it in front of the printer 4 Pull out the left and right Basket Hooks from the Ejection Guide Handling Paper Output Stacker iPF8300 Using the Output Stacker 7 817 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 836: ... tag of the Basket Cloth is on the left 6 Form the Basket Cloth into a sloping shape to make it taut and attach the middle Basket Rod to the Rod Holder Handling Paper Output Stacker Using the Output Stacker iPF8300 7 818 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 837: ... when storing printed documents a lift the front Basket Rod gently to release the lock lower the stacker toward the front b and push it all the way back 2 Remove the front Basket Rod from the left and right basket arms Roll up the Basket Cloth and put it at the back of the Bottom Stand Stay Handling Paper Output Stacker iPF8300 Storing the Output Stacker 7 819 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Ma...

Page 838: ...et Rod so they do not interfere with the Media Take up Sensor indicated by the dashed line 3 Push in the left and right basket arms toward the back all the way until they stop Handling Paper Output Stacker Storing the Output Stacker iPF8300 7 820 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 839: ...tions on installing the Media Take up Unit refer to the Media Take up Unit Setup Guide For information on the types of paper compatible with the Media Take up Unit refer to the Paper Reference Guide See Types of Paper P 768 For Media Take up Unit instructions see Using the Media Take up Unit Optional P 821 Using the Media Take up Unit Optional 1 Turn the printer on See Turning the Printer On and O...

Page 840: ...ng time before the final check of colors and do not remove printed documents from the Media Take up Unit too soon In humid environments documents printed using plenty of ink on relatively insubstantial media such as light weight Coated Paper may not be retracted evenly by the unit In this case take steps to control humidity in the operating environment or adjust the Roll DryingTime setting so that...

Page 841: ...ot displayed press the Menu button 4 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 5 Press or to select Take up Reel and then press the OK button 6 Press or to select Use Take up Reel and then press the OK button 7 Press or to select Disable and then press the OK button Loading the Rewind Spool on the Media Take up Unit 1 When using the Output Stacker stow the Output Stacker before this proced...

Page 842: ... from the shaft side Remove the flange 3 When rewinding rolls with 3 inch paper cores insert the 3 inch Adapter on the flanges at both ends Handling Paper Media take up unit Loading the Rewind Spool on the Media Take up Unit iPF8300 7 824 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 843: ... the paper core is secured in place and push down the lever a toward the shaft Important After pushing in the flanges firmly make sure the paper core is secure and does not move around Move the paper core left and right If there is a gap between the flanges and paper core repeat steps 2 4 Handling Paper Media take up unit iPF8300 Loading the Rewind Spool on the Media Take up Unit 7 825 Downloaded ...

Page 844: ...it b the Media Take up Unit cannot be turned on 7 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Settings Adj tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 8 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 9 Press or to select Take up Reel and then press the OK button 10 Press or to select Auto Feed and then press the OK button The roll is n...

Page 845: ...r evenly taut tape the middle to the paper core to fasten it 12 Making sure the roll paper is not slack tape the left and right side of the leading edge to the paper core Note When rewinding heavyweight paper use strong adhesive tape to fasten it Handling Paper Media take up unit iPF8300 Loading the Rewind Spool on the Media Take up Unit 7 827 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 846: ...aper so that the paper core makes at least two revolutions If the paper is not rewound two full revolutions repeat steps 13 and 14 Do not manually force the Rewind Spool or paper core to rotate them This may damage them To rewind or unwind rolls press or on the Media Take up Unit Handling Paper Media take up unit Loading the Rewind Spool on the Media Take up Unit iPF8300 7 828 Downloaded from Manu...

Page 847: ...to each Weight Roll Weight Roll Roll Width Weight Roll to Use B2 Width 515 0 mm 20 3 in D B1 Width 728 0 mm 28 7 in A E B0 Width 1 030 0 mm 40 6 in A G A1 Width 594 0 mm 23 4 in E A0 Width 841 0 mm 33 1 in B E 431 8 mm 17 in C 609 6 mm 24 in E 762 0 mm 30 in B D 914 4 mm 36 in G 1 066 8 mm 42 in C E 1 117 6 mm 44 in D E Handling Paper Media take up unit iPF8300 Loading the Rewind Spool on the Medi...

Page 848: ...nuinePpr or Auto OtherPaper See Automatic Banding Adjustment Adj Quality P 846 Note Do not use combinations other than those identified here Insert the Weight Flange and Weight Joint firmly on the Weight Roll Use identical Weight Flange on the left and right ends Insert matching Weight Flanges 1 or 2 on both ends of the Weight Roll Keep unused weight rolls weight joints and weight flanges handy by...

Page 849: ... Take up Unit Optional 1 Press the Feed button 2 Hold down the button to advance the roll a little To protect the paper that has been rewound advance it an amount longer than the outer circumference Handling Paper Media take up unit iPF8300 Removing Printed Documents from the Media Take up Unit Optional 7 831 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 850: ...utton The roll is now cut Important Always hold the trailing edge of printed documents when cutting rolls If you do not hold the docu ments they may fall on the floor and the printed surface may become soiled Handling Paper Media take up unit Removing Printed Documents from the Media Take up Unit Optional iPF8300 7 832 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 851: ...e tape to the rewound paper to hold it in place if necessary Important Be careful not to scratch the printed surface 7 Turn off the Media Take up Unit by pushing in the Rewind Mode Switch Handling Paper Media take up unit iPF8300 Removing Printed Documents from the Media Take up Unit Optional 7 833 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 852: ...u do not turn it off first Remove the Rewind Spool pulling off both ends from the Media Take up Unit at once 9 Unlock the flange on the left side of the Rewind Spool by lifting the lever a from the shaft side Remove the flange Handling Paper Media take up unit Removing Printed Documents from the Media Take up Unit Optional iPF8300 7 834 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 853: ...e Rewind Spool Note You can leave the Rewind Spool on the Media Take up Unit even when it is not used for rewinding rolls Handling Paper Media take up unit iPF8300 Removing Printed Documents from the Media Take up Unit Optional 7 835 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 854: ...int Quality Adjustment for high precision printing 837 Adjusting the Printhead 839 Adjusting the feed amount 845 Color adjustment 854 Adjustments for Better Print Quality iPF8300 8 836 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 855: ...only Thickness weight 300 μm or less or 300 g m or less Width 25 4 cm 10 in or more Standard Adjustment Perform standard adjustment with the Printhead height set to Automatic 1 Load paper in the printer Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls P 774 Loading Rolls in the Printer P 777 2 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Settings Adj tab Note Auto Expansion may be una...

Page 856: ...brasion and Blurry Images Head Height P 843 Note If Super Low is not available select Lowest 2 In Head Posi Adj select Auto Expansion Note If paper rubs against the Printhead or becomes jammed during Printhead height adjustment try select ing a higher level in Head Height and performing Auto Expansion again 3 Return Head Height to Automatic Important If Head Height is not returned to Automatic the...

Page 857: ...raighten Lines and Colors Head Posi Adj P 841 Paper rubs against the printhead or image edges are blurred Executing Head Height to adjust the printhead height may improve printing results See Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images Head Height P 843 Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors Head Posi Adj If vertical lines in printed documents are warped or colors are out of alig...

Page 858: ... to Prepare Rolls An unused roll at least 10 inches wide Sheets Auto Standard Three sheets of unused paper A4 Letter size or one sheet when using A2 Auto Advanced 11 sheets of unused paper A4 Letter size or three sheets when using A2 Auto Expansion Seven sheets of unused paper A4 Letter size or two sheets when using A2 Perform adjustment as follows 1 Load paper Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls P...

Page 859: ... Head Posi Adj P 839 However when printing on special paper or if printing is not improved after Auto Advanced try Manual Manual adjustment requires you to examine the printed test pattern and enter an adjustment value Note Manual may be unavailable in some cases even if it is displayed in the menu If so execute Auto Advanced once Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specifi...

Page 860: ...ress or to select D 1 and then press the OK button 9 Examine adjustment test pattern D 1 and determine the number with straight lines Note If two patterns seem equally good and you cannot decide which one is better choose an intermediate value For example choose 11 if you cannot decide whether pattern 10 or 12 is better 10 Press or to select the pattern number you have decided and then press the O...

Page 861: ...quality Important Paper rubbing against or becoming caught on the Printhead may jam or result in printed documents that are soiled Note Raise or lower the printhead depending on the nature of the problem See Paper rubs against the printhead P 1058 See The edges of the paper are dirty P 1058 See Image edges are blurred or white banding occurs P 1062 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Pane...

Page 862: ...ss the OK button 6 Press or to select the desired setting value and then press the OK button Note Using Automatic will ensure that the printer adjusts the Printhead height to the optimal level before printing accounting for the ambient temperature and humidity When a setting other than Automatic is used that value will always be applied Depending on the type of paper some setting values may not be...

Page 863: ...ing Line Length Adjust Length P 850 3 After executing Adj Quality execute Adj Fine Feed for further adjustment as needed See Fine Tuning the Paper Feed Amount Adj Fine Feed P 850 Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method Feed Priority Methods of adjusting the amount paper is fed are set in Adj Priority Adjust Adj Priority to suit your particular printing application Print Quality Adjusts the feed ...

Page 864: ...ton The Set Adj Menu is displayed 4 Press or to select Adjust Printer and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select Feed Priority and then press the OK button 6 Press or to select Adj Priority and then press the OK button 7 Press or to select Automatic Print Quality or Print Length and then press the OK button Automatic Banding Adjustment Adj Quality If printed images are affected by banding i...

Page 865: ...ding on the type of paper Use paper of the same type and size for adjustment as you will use for printing Items to Prepare Rolls An unused roll at least 10 inches wide Sheets Auto GenuinePpr One sheet of unused paper A4 Letter size Auto OtherPaper Two sheets of unused paper A4 Letter size or one sheet when using A2 Perform adjustment as follows 1 Load paper Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls P 774...

Page 866: ...adjustment requires you to enter an adjustment value after a test pattern is printed Note Always check the Adj Priority values before using Manual adjustment See Selecting a Feed Amount Adjustment Method Feed Priority P 845 If additional fine tuning is necessary after Manual adjustment use Adj Fine Feed See Fine Tuning the Paper Feed Amount Adj Fine Feed P 850 Use Adjust Length to ensure that line...

Page 867: ...pattern A for adjustment Determine the pattern in which banding is least noticeable Note If banding seems least noticeable in two patterns but you cannot decide which one is better choose an intermediate value For example choose 11 if you cannot decide whether pattern 10 or 12 is better 9 Press or to select the pattern number you have decided and then press the OK button Test pattern B is printed ...

Page 868: ...ess or to select the Settings Adj tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Adj Fine Feed and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select a setting value in the range 5 to 5 and then press the OK button The setting is now applied Adjusting Line Length Adjust Length To ensure that lines in C...

Page 869: ...s One sheet of unused paper of at least A4 Letter size High precision ruler Perform adjustment as follows 1 Load the paper Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls P 774 Loading Rolls in the Printer P 777 Loading Sheets in the Printer P 802 Note Always make sure the loaded paper matches the type of paper specified Adjustment cannot be com pleted correctly unless the loaded paper matches the settings 2 O...

Page 870: ...actual size use a positive setting value If it is longer use a negative value The feed amount can be adjusted in 0 02 increments Adjusting the Vacuum Strength VacuumStrngth When printing on heavyweight paper or paper that curls or wrinkles easily if the Printhead rubs against paper adjusting the level of suction against paper on the Platen may improve results Important Paper rubbing against or bec...

Page 871: ...he type of paper currently supplied However the value is cleared when the printer is turned off or the paper is replaced 5 Press or to select VacuumStrngth and then press the OK button 6 Press or to select the desired setting value and then press the OK button Adjustments for Better Print Quality Adjusting the feed amount iPF8300 Adjusting the Vacuum Strength VacuumStrngth 8 853 Downloaded from Ma...

Page 872: ...r driver under the same settings Executing color calibration will print a test pattern which the printer will read to set the adjustment value automatically Important Color calibration requires one of the following types of paper Note that various environmental conditions are recommended for various types of paper Use the printer only where the recommended environmental condi tions for the paper a...

Page 873: ... Media Configuration Tool is deleted if you have cali brated the printer using paper with information added by the Media Configuration Tool color calibration executed this way can no longer be applied to any type of paper If you wish to apply calibration results prepare calibration compatible paper that was in the original settings and perform calibration again See Me dia Configuration Tool P 440 ...

Page 874: ... two ways to adjust the color tone for the ambient light as follows By selecting color tones on Chart before printing On the printed Chart note the number of the set of colors with the desired color tone and enter this number in the printer driver before printing Important This function is only supported in Windows and Mac OS X 10 4 or later The colors in this function may differ slightly dependin...

Page 875: ... P 866 Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light Mac OS X P 869 Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing Windows Print Chart note the number of the chart with your desired color tone and enter this number in the printer driver before printing Important This function requires that the Light Source Check Tool be installed You can install the Light Source Check Tool from the User ...

Page 876: ... 768 5 Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode 6 In FPrint Quality click Highest or High Important Ambient Light Adjust is only available when the FPrint Quality is set to Highest or High 7 Click Color in the GColor Mode list 8 Click HColor Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printi...

Page 877: ...Color Space and the monitor color tempera ture in DMonitor White Point 11 Select EUse ambient light adjustment 12 Click FAmbient Light Adjust to display the Ambient Light Adjust dialog box 13 Confirm that By selecting a chart number is selected in ASetting Method If it is not selected already select it Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment iPF8300 Selecting Color Tones on Charts Be...

Page 878: ...ool now starts up 15 Check the settings and click DPrint The Chart is printed Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing Windows iPF8300 8 860 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 879: ... Temperature and EIlluminance as measured during monitor calibration 19 Click OK 20 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing Mac OS X Print Chart note the number of the chart with your desired color tone and enter this number in the printer driver before printing 1 Choose Print in the application menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and...

Page 880: ...ht matching may not be available depending on the type of paper used For more infor mation see the Paper Reference Guide See Types of Paper P 768 5 Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing Mac OS X iPF8300 8 862 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 881: ...0 Make sure Driver Matching Mode is selected in AMatching Mode Note To specify monitor matching select Monitor Matching in BMatching Method In this case select the same color space as when the file was opened in CColor Space and the monitor color tempera ture in DMonitor White Point 11 Select EUse ambient light adjustment Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment iPF8300 Selecting Colo...

Page 882: ...chart number is selected in ASetting Method If it is not selected already select it 14 Click BPrint Chart Light Source Check Tool now starts up Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment Selecting Color Tones on Charts Before Printing Mac OS X iPF8300 8 864 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 883: ...e sky and the red of the strawberries look the most natural overall 17 In the Ambient Light Adjust dialog box select the number of your preferred chart in CChart Number 18 If Matching Method is set to Monitor Matching on the Matching panel enter the DColor Temperature and EIlluminance as measured during monitor calibration Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment iPF8300 Selecting Col...

Page 884: ...Source Measure Tool 1 Using the i1 spectrophotometer and the Light Source Measure Tool determine the Lighting Source Type Color Temperature and Illuminance in the viewing environment Note For detailed instructions on the i1 and Light Source Measure Tool refer to the provided instructions 2 Choose Print in the application menu 3 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driv...

Page 885: ... 6 Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode 7 In FPrint Quality click Highest or High Important Ambient Light Adjust is only available when the FPrint Quality is set to Highest or High 8 Click Color in the GColor Mode list 9 Click HColor Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment iPF8300 Printing in Colors Matching the Measured ...

Page 886: ...n the file was opened in CColor Space and the monitor color tempera ture in DMonitor White Point 12 Select EUse ambient light adjustment 13 Click FAmbient Light Adjust to display the Ambient Light Adjust dialog box 14 Select By entering values directly in ASetting Method Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light Windows iPF8300 8 8...

Page 887: ...s function requires the i1 spectrophotometer The Light Source Measure Tool must also be installed You can install the Light Source Measure Tool from the User Software CD ROM For a list of supported i1 devices refer to the manual provided with the Light Source Measure Tool 1 Using the i1 spectrophotometer and the Light Source Measure Tool determine the Lighting Source Type Color Temperature and Ill...

Page 888: ...matching may not be available depending on the type of paper used For more infor mation see the Paper Reference Guide See Types of Paper P 768 6 Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light Mac OS X iPF8300 8 870 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 889: ...ake sure Driver Matching Mode is selected in AMatching Mode Note To specify monitor matching select Monitor Matching in BMatching Method In this case select the same color space as when the file was opened in CColor Space and the monitor color tempera ture in DMonitor White Point 12 Select EUse ambient light adjustment Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment iPF8300 Printing in Color...

Page 890: ...olor Temperature determined in step 1 If you have selected Monitor Matching in Matching Method on the Matching panel also select EIlluminance 16 Click OK 17 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light Mac OS X iPF8300 8 872 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 891: ...y not be configurable or adjustable depending on your monitor and the source application Note Printing in exactly the same colors as displayed on the monitor may not be possible due to differences in the monitor and printer color gamuts Calibrating your monitor requires a measuring device Because colors appear different under sunlight at different times of day we recommend following this proce dur...

Page 892: ...application If you own an i1 Pro using Light Source Measure Tool enables more precision measurement of the ambient light Note If you will print repeatedly using the settings values you set this one time we recommend completing the settings by accessing the printer driver dialog box from the operating system menu See Ac cessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu Windows P ...

Page 893: ...t light matching may not be available depending on the type of paper used For more infor mation see the Paper Reference Guide See Types of Paper P 768 5 Click DAdvanced Settings to switch the print mode Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment iPF8300 Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors Windows 8 875 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 894: ...ct Monitor Matching 12 In CColor Space select the color space used when displaying the file in the source application 13 In DMonitor White Point select the white point set on the monitor Note For greater precision in monitor matching we recommend configuring the settings for ambient light matching See Printing in Ideal Colors for Light in the Viewing Environment P 856 14 Click OK 15 Confirm the pr...

Page 895: ...lication menu 2 Select the printer in the dialog box and then display the printer driver dialog box See Accessing the Printer Driv er Dialog Box from Applications Mac OS X P 485 3 Make sure the Main panel is displayed 4 In the AMedia Type list select the type of paper that is loaded for example Premium Glossy Paper 200 Important Ambient light matching may not be available depending on the type of ...

Page 896: ...ust is only available when the FPrint Quality is set to Highest or High 7 Click Color in the HColor Mode list 8 Click ISet to display the Color Settings dialog box Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment Printing Images to Match Monitor Colors Mac OS X iPF8300 8 878 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 897: ... DMonitor White Point select the white point set on the monitor Note For greater precision in monitor matching we recommend configuring the settings for ambient light matching See Printing in Ideal Colors for Light in the Viewing Environment P 856 14 Click OK 15 Confirm the print settings and print as desired Adjustments for Better Print Quality Color adjustment iPF8300 Printing Images to Match Mo...

Page 898: ...Printer Parts Printer parts 881 Control Panel 891 Hard Disk 935 Optional accessories 940 Printer Specifications 942 Printer Parts iPF8300 9 880 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 899: ...ve any jammed paper from inside the printer as needed See Top Cover Inside P 884 b Cutter Groove Paper is cut using the cutter or manually with scissors over this groove c Ejection Guide Guides printed documents as they are ejected Raise the guide when loading a roll d Roll Holder Slot Slide the Roll Holder into this slot Printer Parts Printer parts iPF8300 Front 9 881 Downloaded from ManualsPrint...

Page 900: ...this panel to operate the printer and check the printer status See Control Panel P 891 l Release Lever Releases the Paper Retainer Lift this lever toward the front of the printer when loading paper m Maintenance Cartridge Absorbs ink used for maintenance purposes such as head cleaning Replace the cartridge when it is full n Carrying Handles When carrying the printer have four people hold it by the...

Page 901: ...ia Take up Unit here c Ethernet Port Connect an Ethernet cable to this port The lamp is lit if the Ethernet cable is connected correctly and communication is possible between the computer and printer d USB Port Connect a USB cable to this port This port is compatible with USB 2 0 High Speed mode Printer Parts Printer parts iPF8300 Back 9 883 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 902: ...ocket f Power Supply Connector Connect the power cord to this connector Top Cover Inside a Top Cover Roller Prevents paper from rising when ejected Printer Parts Printer parts Top Cover Inside iPF8300 9 884 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 903: ...r under the Top Cover use this brush to sweep away paper dust on the Platen Also use the brush to move the blue Switch on the Platen i Fixed Blade The Cutter Unit passes over this rail to cut paper j Linear Scale The linear scale serves a key role in detecting the Carriage position Be careful not to touch this part when cleaning inside the Top Cover or clearing paper jams k Switch Set the switch t...

Page 904: ...utter Unit Detachment Lever Used when replacing the Cutter Unit Ink Tank Cover Inside Left Side Right Side Note The figure shows the printer as loaded with 700 ml 23 7 fl oz Ink Tank a Ink tanks Cartridges of ink in various colors b Ink Tank Lock Lever A lever that locks the Ink Tank in place and protects it Lift and lower the lever when replacing an Ink Tank To open it lift the stopper of the lev...

Page 905: ...follows when the Ink Tank Cover is opened On The Ink Tank is installed correctly Off No Ink Tank is installed or the ink level detection function is disabled Flashing Slowly Not much ink is left Flashing Rapidly Ink tank is empty Printer Parts Printer parts iPF8300 Ink Tank Cover Inside 9 887 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 906: ...o this part d Bottom Stand Stay Supports Stand L and Stand R e Leg Covers Covers for Stand L and Stand R f Stopper Locks the Stand casters Always release the Stopper before moving the printer Moving the printer while the Stopper is locked may scratch the casters or the floor Printer Parts Printer parts Stand iPF8300 9 888 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 907: ... and buttons to advance or rewind paper and a power cord c Rewind Spool Winds documents printed on rolls d 3 inch Adapter When rewinding rolls with 3 inch paper cores attach the adapter to the Rewind Spool e Media Take up Sensor A sensor for automatically rewinding rolls Weight Printer Parts Printer parts iPF8300 Media Take up Unit Optional 9 889 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 908: ...nt Fastens two weight rolls c Weight Flange 2 sets Attached to the ends of Weight Roll to adjust the weight Use Weight Flange 1 or Weight Flange 2 depending on the type of paper See Loading the Rewind Spool on the Media Take up Unit P 823 Printer Parts Printer parts Media Take up Unit Optional iPF8300 9 890 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 909: ...Control Panel a Display Screen Shows printer menus as well as the printer status and messages b Data Lamp green Flashing During printing the Data lamp flashes when the printer is receiving or processing print jobs Otherwise this lamp flashes when the print job is paused or the printer is updating the firmware Off There are no active print jobs when the Data lamp is off c Message Lamp orange On A w...

Page 910: ...ates to press the OK button g Stop button Cancels print jobs in progress and ends the ink drying period h Power button green Turns the printer on and off See Turning the Printer On and Off P 893 The Power button is lit when the printer is on or in Sleep mode i Navigate button Enables you to check instructions for loading and removing paper or replacing ink tanks or printheads as well as other oper...

Page 911: ...up After the Display Screen shows the Canon logo Starting up Please wait is displayed 2 The Power Lamp is lit when the printer finishes starting up and the printer is now in Standby The printer will not go into Standby in the following situations Take the appropriate action The Top Cover is open Close the Top Cover The Ink Tank Cover is open Close the Ink Tank Cover Printer Parts Control Panel iPF...

Page 912: ... a Macintosh computer that is off may cause the computer to start up at the same time To prevent this disconnect the USB cable before starting the printer Connecting the printer to the computer via a USB hub may solve this issue Turning the printer off Important Never disconnect the printer s power supply or unplug it during a print job This may damage the printer 1 Make sure no print jobs are in ...

Page 913: ...ng the OK button when this tab is highlighted will display the Paper Menu Top line displayed The paper icon is highlighted Middle line displayed Indicates the printer status and shows menu names Bottom line displayed The first and second lines display the paper type and size Ink tab A tab indicating status and showing menus related to ink Pressing the OK button when this tab is highlighted will di...

Page 914: ...apacity is shown on the first line and Tot Print Area on the second The display unit for Tot Print Area can be specified in the Length Unit menu See Menu Settings P 912 Printer status and modes Printer status is classified according to the following five modes Standby The printer is ready to receive jobs sent from the computer Jobs sent from the computer are printed immediately Printing Paused Pri...

Page 915: ... Timer menu See Menu Settings P 912 After entering Sleep mode from Standby mode the printer automatically recovers if print jobs are received and the jobs are printed Error The printer requires your attention Any jobs sent from the computer cannot be processed The tab related to the error is displayed For information about the display in the case of multiple errors see Error display P 899 Mode tra...

Page 916: ...not enter Sleep mode while error messages are displayed or when a roll can be manually advanced by pressing the Feed button 2 When the printer is in Sleep mode you can press any button except the Power button to recover from Sleep mode Sleep mode is also terminated if a print job is received or a command is issued from RemoteUI Error display Printer Parts Control Panel Control Panel Display iPF830...

Page 917: ...r 4 seconds on each tab before another message is shown How to View Instructions With Navigate You can refer to instructions for loading paper replacing ink tanks and performing other operations on the printer control panel 1 Press the Navigate button 2 Press or to select the desired navigation menu 3 Press or to select View Op Guide and then press the OK button Instructions are now displayed Prin...

Page 918: ... Example Loading sheets Printer Parts Control Panel How to View Instructions With Navigate iPF8300 9 900 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 919: ...enu items see Menu Operations P 902 Note By default menu settings apply to all print jobs However for settings that are also available in the printer driver the values specified in the printer driver take priority Menu operations during printing To display menus during printing select a tab on the Tab Selection screen on the Control Panel and then press the OK button Other menus are available afte...

Page 920: ...l Panel to access menus on various tabs from the Tab Selection screen and set or exe cute Menu items The following sections describe menu operations Accessing menus P 902 Specifying menu items P 903 Specifying numerical values P 904 Executing menu commands P 904 Accessing menus Printer menus are grouped by function Menus are displayed with the upper line selected You can use the buttons on the Con...

Page 921: ...t to the second and subsequent rows To access the lower me nus select the menu and press the OK button Specifying menu items Menu items can be set as follows 1 Press or to select the desired setting and then press the OK button After two seconds the display reverts to the upper level menu Note If a confirmation message is displayed regarding the setting you entered press the OK button The setting ...

Page 922: ...ds Menu commands can be executed as follows 1 Press or to select the action to execute and then press the OK button The menu command is now executed Menu Structure The menu structure is organized by tabs as follows Values at right indicated by an asterisk are the defaults Paper Menu P 904 Ink Menu P 906 Job Menu P 906 Set Adj Menu P 907 For instructions on menu operations see Menu Operations P 902...

Page 923: ... P 906 Head Height Automatic Highest High Standard Low Lowest Super Low Skew Check Lv Standard Loose Off Cutting Mode Automatic Eject Manual Cut Speed Fast Standard Slow Trim Edge First Automatic Off On CutDustReduct Off On VacuumStrngth Automatic Strongest Strong Standard Weak Weakest Scan Wait Time Off 1 sec 3 sec 5 sec 7 sec 9 sec Roll DryingTime Off 30 sec 1 min 3 min 5 min 10 min 30 min 60 mi...

Page 924: ...n Tool P 440 or Media Configuration Tool P 671 2 Available only if Width Detection is Off 3 For information on the sizes of paper the printer supports see Paper Sizes P 771 4 Available only if ManageRemainRoll is On Ink Menu First Level Rep Ink Tank Head Cleaning A Job Menu First Level Second Level Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Print Job Job List Choose a print job Delete Preempt Jobs 1 P 9...

Page 925: ...econd Lev el Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level Sixth Level Seventh Level Test Print Nozzle Check Status Print Interface Print Paper Details Print Job Log Menu Map Adjust Printer Head Posi Adj Auto Standard Auto Advanced Auto Expansion 1 P 912 Manual 1 P 912 Feed Priori ty Adj Priority 2 P 912 Automatic Print Quality Print Length Adj Quality 2 P 912 3 P 912 Auto GenuinePpr Auto OtherPaper Manual...

Page 926: ...tter Interface Setup EOP Timer 5 P 912 10 sec 30 sec 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 30 min 60 min TCP IP 5 P 912 IPv4 IPv4 Mode Automatic Manual Protocol 6 P 912 DHCP On Off BOOTP On Off RARP On Off IPv4 Set tings 7 P 912 IP Address xxx xxx xxx xxx Subnet Mask xxx xxx xxx xxx Default G W xxx xxx xxx xxx DNS Set tings 7 P 912 DNS Dync update On Off Pri DNS SrvAddr Sec DNS SrvAddr DNS Host Name DNS Domain...

Page 927: ...ernet 2 Ethernet 802 2 Ethernet 802 3 Ethernet SNAP Print Service 9 P 912 BinderyPServer RPrinter NDSPServer NPrinter AppleTalk 5 P 912 On Off Ethernet Driver 5 P 912 Auto Detect On Off Comm Mode 10 P 912 Half Duplex Full Duplex Ethernet Type 10 P 912 10 Base T 100 Base TX 1000 Base T Spanning Tree Not Use Use MAC Ad dress xxxxxxxxxxxx Interface Print 5 P 912 Return Defaults 5 P 912 System Set up ...

Page 928: ...d yyyy Language Time Zone 5 P 912 0 London GMT 1 Paris Rome 2 Athens Cairo 3 Moscow 4 Eerevan Baku 5 Islamabad 6 Dacca 7 Bangkok 8 Hong Kong 9 Tokyo Seoul 10 Canberra 11NewCaledonia 12 Wellington 12 Eniwetok 11 Midway is 10Hawaii AHST 9 Alaska AKST 8 Oregon PST 7 Arizona MST 6 Texas CST 5 NewYork EST 4 Santiago 3 Buenos Aires 2 1 Cape Verde Length Unit meter feet inch Printer Parts Control Panel M...

Page 929: ...e Warning Off On CarriageS canWdth Automatic Fixed Use Remo teUI 5 P 912 On Off Reset PaprSetngs 5 P 912 Erase HDD Data High Speed 5 P 912 Secure High Spd 5 P 912 Secure 5 P 912 Output Method Print Print Auto Del Save Box XX Print After Recv Off On Common Box Set 5 P 912 Print Print Auto Del Show Job Log 5 P 912 Off On Take up Reel 12 P 912 Use Take up Reel Disable Enable Auto Feed 13 P 912 Skip T...

Page 930: ...ot displayed if NetWare is Off 10 Not displayed if Auto Detect is On 11 Follows the setting in Date Format 12 Displayed only when the Media Take up Unit is attached 13 Available if a Use Take up Reel is Enable b roll paper is loaded and c you have not executed Auto Feed for the loaded roll 14 Available when Use Take up Reel is Enable Menu Settings Menu items are as follows For instructions on sele...

Page 931: ...al cutting speed for the type of paper We recommend keeping the preset cutting speed If you use adhesive paper choosing Slow helps prevent ad hesive from sticking to the cutter and keeps the cutter sharp Trim Edge First If a roll is loaded the end of the paper will be cut CutDustRe duct If you choose On a line will be printed at the cut position when paper cutting is selected This option reduces t...

Page 932: ... Paper Details to the default values Paper Details Print the paper settings as specified in Paper Details Keep Paper Type Select On when printing on a particular type of paper regu larly See Changing the Type of Paper P 784 1 For information on the types of paper the printer supports refer to the Paper Reference Guide See Types of Paper P 768 The types of paper indicated in the printer driver and ...

Page 933: ...on sumed per job 1 P 915 Print settings A counter for maintenance purposes Indicates job print settings Head Height A counter for maintenance purposes Indicates the head height when jobs wereprinted Temp Humidity A counter for maintenance purposes Indicates the tem perature and humiditywhen jobs were printed Adjustment req A counter for maintenance purposes Indicates adjustment conditions appliedt...

Page 934: ...Printhead alignment relative to the printing direction and spacing between nozzles and colors Adjustment is performed at a higher level of precision than Auto Advanced See Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors Head Posi Adj P 839 Manual Print a test pattern for adjustment of Printhead align ment relative to the printing direction Enter the ad justment value manually based on the resu...

Page 935: ...nds to stretch increase the feed amount by choosing a higher adjustment value For paper that tends to shrink decrease the feed amount by choosing a lower adjustment value B Standard Draft Cali bra tion Auto Adjust Choose Yes for automatic adjustment of the adjust ment value after a test pattern for color calibration is printed The new color calibration adjustment value is applied in all print jobs...

Page 936: ...Timer Specify the timeout period before cancellation of print jobs that cannot be received by the printer TCP IP IPv4 IPv4 Mode Choose whether the printer IP address is configured automatically or a static IP address is entered man ually Proto col DHCP Specify the protocol used to configure the IP address automatically BOOTP RARP IPv4 Set tings IP Address Specify the printer network information wh...

Page 937: ...f the LAN communication protocol Choose Off to use settings values of Comm Mode and Ethernet Type Comm Mode Choose the LAN communication method Ethernet Type Choose the LAN transfer rate Spanning Tree Choose whether spanning tree packets are supported over the LAN MAC Address Indicates the MAC address Interface Print Print interface settings information Return Defaults Choose OK to restore Interfa...

Page 938: ...nt queue awaiting process ing See Using the Printer Hard Disk P 714 Paper Size Basis Sht Selection 1 If sheet size detection is activated choose whether ISO A3 or 13 x19 Super B is applied when a sheet of an intermediate size is detected Sht Selection 2 If sheet size detection is activated choose whether ISO B1 or 28 x40 ANSI F is applied when a sheet of an intermediate size is detected Keep Paper...

Page 939: ...cure High Spd Overwrites the entire hard disk with random data See Erasing Data on the Printer s Hard Disk P 938 Secure Overwrites the entire hard disk with 00 FF and ran dom data one time each Verification is performed to check if the data was correctly written See Erasing Data on the Printer s Hard Disk P 938 Output Meth od Print Select the printing method for jobs received from software other t...

Page 940: ...ssword you can restrict menu display and configuration as follows Enter a number in the range 0 9999999 Viewing and configuration by administrators only IPv4 Settings Change Password Init Admin Pswd Viewing and configuration by administrators and only viewing by other users Interface Setup settings except IPv4 Settings Date Time Date Format Time Zone Use RemoteUI Reset PaprSetngs Common Box Set In...

Page 941: ... Printhead P 999 Execute Head Cleaning A if printing is faint oddly colored or contains for eign substances Job Menu Setting Item Description Instructions Print Job Job List Choose a print job Delete Delete the current job or queued jobs See Managing the Job Queue Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs P 719 Preempt Jobs Print the job first after the cur rent print job is finished See Managing the Job ...

Page 942: ...paused HDD Information Indicates the total hard disk ca pacity and the mail box free space 1 A rough estimate of how much ink was consumed per job is displayed Actual ink consumption may be different The average margin of error for estimates calculated according to Canon measurement conditions for ink costs is 15 Canon does not guarantee the accuracy of these estimates Estimates may vary depending...

Page 943: ...size You will need at least four sheets 2 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select Settings Adj tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 3 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 4 Press or to select Test Print and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select Status Print and then press the OK button Checking the information ...

Page 944: ...s and adjustment in formation System Setup Printer system settings as well as settings regarding warnings and errors Sleep Timer Buzzer Contrast Adj Date Format Language Time Zone Length Unit Detect Mismatch Paper Size Basis Sht Selection 1 Sht Selection 2 Keep Paper Size Paper related settings Rep P head Print Settings after a test pattern was printed following head replacement Nozzle Check Nozzl...

Page 945: ...or calibration results are used Take up Reel Settings regarding the Me dia Take up Unit Use Take up Reel Skip Take Up Err Printer Info Ink information RAM us age and a record of errors Ink Info Ink related information MC Maintenance Cartridge ca pacity PC C MBK Y M PM R G B PGY GY BK Ink levels The remaining ink is dis played in a five level scale System Info Indicates the total amount of RAM RAM ...

Page 946: ...nterface Print report indicating the current interface settings values of the printer Interface Print reports indicate settings values for TCP IP NetWare and other settings Printing Interface Print reports 1 Load the paper If using sheets load paper A4 Letter sized you will need at least three sheets 2 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Settings Adj tab Note If...

Page 947: ...sion MIT DB MIT Database Version S N Printer serial number Date The date when the interface setup print report was printed EOP Timer Specify the timeout period be fore cancellation of print jobs that cannot be received by the printer TCP IPv4 Frame Type IPv4 settings values Use DHCP Use BOOTP Use RARP Enable DNS Dynamic Update Use Zeroconf Function IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address LPD Printi...

Page 948: ...ss Use a stateless ad dress Stateless Address 1 Prefix Length 1 Stateless Address 2 Prefix Length 2 Stateless Address 3 Prefix Length 3 Stateless Address 4 Prefix Length 4 Stateless Address 5 Prefix Length 5 Stateless Address 6 Prefix Length 6 Use a link local Ad dress Link Local Ad dress Prefix Length Use a manual address IP Address Prefix Length Default Router Address Printer Parts Control Panel...

Page 949: ...pe NetWare settings values IPX External Network Number Node Number Print Application Bindery PSer ver File Server Name Print Server Name Print Server Password Polling Inter val RPrinter Print Server Name Printer Num ber NDS PServer Tree Name Context Name Print Server Name Print Server Password Polling Inter val NPrinter Print Server Name Printer Num ber AppleTalk Phase Type AppleTalk settings valu...

Page 950: ...rol panel when loading paper replacing ink tanks or performing other oper ations How to view instructions Once you complete an action described in the instructions the printer detects the action and switches to the next instruction screen In the case of actions the printer cannot detect instruction screens are switched every four seconds and the sequence of operations is shown repeatedly Printer P...

Page 951: ...ce are finished the instruction screen for the next step is displayed Example Ink tank replacement Printer Parts Control Panel iPF8300 Checking Instructions During Printer Operations 9 933 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 952: ...r button to display the previous or next screens If you do not press the or button within 30 seconds continuous display is resumed Press the OK button to display the instruction screen for the next step Printer Parts Control Panel Checking Instructions During Printer Operations iPF8300 9 934 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 953: ...ut saving jobs in the shared mailbox No No No Yes Save print jobs sent from sources other than the printer driver No No No Yes Operations with saved jobs Print saved jobs No Yes Yes Yes Delete saved jobs No Yes Yes Yes Job queue management Display job queue No Yes Yes Yes Delete No Yes Yes Yes Priority No Yes Yes Yes Mail box management Move saved jobs No Yes Yes No Modify saved jobs No Yes Yes No...

Page 954: ...ab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Job Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select HDD Information and then press the OK button Using RemoteUI To view the box list select Stored Job in Job Management On the Stored Job page the free hard disk space is shown in the upper right corner when boxes are listed For details refer to the RemoteUI ...

Page 955: ...rd disk space For details refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help file Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor The Hard Disk pane shows the free hard disk space Printer Parts Hard Disk iPF8300 Checking the Free Hard Disk Space 9 937 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 956: ...entire hard disk with 00 FF and random data one time each Verification is performed to check if the data was correctly written Choose this method to erase especially confidential data It is virtually impossible to recover the overwritten data Conforms to the DoD5220 22 M standard of the U S Department of Defense Note For a more secure method of preventing data recovery we recommend physically or m...

Page 957: ... password and press the OK button to go to the next step As for the time required for deletion confirm it on the Control Panel However when High Speed is selected this finishes in several seconds 6 Press the OK button to start erasure After the printer hard disk is erased the printer automatically restarts Printer Parts Hard Disk iPF8300 Erasing Data on the Printer s Hard Disk 9 939 Downloaded fro...

Page 958: ...particular paper core See Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls P 774 Roll Holder Set RH2 44 Roll Holder for 2 and 3 inch paper cores Attachments Using the 2 Inch Paper Core Attachment Using the 3 Inch Paper Core Attachment 2 Inch Paper Core Attachment 3 Inch Paper Core Attachment 1 3 Inch Paper Core Attachment 2 Media Take up Unit Automatically winds documents printed on rolls Printer Parts Optional...

Page 959: ...Setup Guide For information on the types of paper compatible with the Media Take up Unit refer to the Paper Reference Guide For Media Take up Unit instructions see Using the Media Take up Unit Optional P 821 Printer Parts Optional accessories iPF8300 Media Take up Unit 9 941 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 960: ... 38 4 45 0 in Weight Printer and Stand not including the Printhead and ink tanks Approx 141 kg 310 8 lb Space for installation W D H Printer only 2 293 1 675 1 500 mm 90 3 65 9 59 1 in Applicable standards International Energy Star Program Law on Promoting Green Purchas ing GPN RoHS Eco Declaration WEEE U S presidential directives 1 The printer uses a trace amount of power even when turned off To ...

Page 961: ...704PC 700 ml or 23 7 fl oz C Ink Tank Cyan Ink Pigment ink PFI 304C 330 ml or 11 2 fl oz or PFI 704C 700 ml or 23 7 fl oz MBK Ink Tank Matte Black Ink Pigment ink PFI 304MBK 330 ml or 11 2 fl oz or PFI 704MBK 700 ml or 23 7 fl oz Y Ink Tank Yellow Ink Pigment ink PFI 304Y 330 ml or 11 2 fl oz or PFI 704Y 700 ml or 23 7 fl oz M Ink Tank Magenta Ink Pigment ink PFI 304M 330 ml or 11 2 fl oz or PFI 7...

Page 962: ...8 5 x14 Letter 8 5 x11 36 x48 ARCH E 30 x42 ARCH E1 26 x38 ARCH E2 27 x39 ARCH E3 24 x36 ARCH D 18 x24 ARCH C 12 x18 ARCH B 9 x12 ARCH A DIN C0 DIN C1 DIN C2 DIN C3 DIN C4 20 x24 18 x22 14 x17 12 x16 10 x12 10 x15 8 x10 US Photo 16 x20 Poster 20 x30 Poster 30 x40 Poster 42 x60 Poster 44 x62 13 x22 and Poster 300x900mm Print area Normal size Printable area Rolls 5 mm 0 2 in from each side Sheets 5 ...

Page 963: ...hes the print area exactly use an oversized paper size that includes the required margin See Printing on Oversized Paper P 81 Margins of Printable Area Margins of Recommended Print Area Top Edge Bottom Edge Sides Top Edge Bottom Edge Sides Sheets 5 mm 0 20 in 23 mm 0 91 in 5 mm 0 20 in 20 mm 0 79 in 23 mm 0 91 in 5 mm 0 20 in Rolls 0 5 mm 0 0 20 in 0 5 mm 0 0 20 in 0 5 mm 0 0 20 in 20 mm 0 79 in 5...

Page 964: ...ation on paper compatible with borderless printing see the Paper Reference Guide See Types of Paper P 768 Recommended Print Area A margin of 20 mm 0 79 in on top 5 mm 0 20 in on bottom and 5 mm 0 20 in on left and right sides is required Printer Parts Printer Specifications Print Area iPF8300 9 946 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 965: ...Network Setting Network Setting 948 Network Setting Windows 963 Network Setting Mac OS X 974 Network Setting iPF8300 10 947 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 966: ...ting over a TCP IP network when using IPv4 Compatible operating systems Windows 2000 Professional or Server Windows XP Home Edition or Professional Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition Windows Vista Home Basic Business Ultimate Windows Server 2008 Standard Edition or Enterprise Edition Windows 7 Windows XP Professional x64 Edition Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition Windows Vista x64 Windows Server 20...

Page 967: ...computer that runs one of the above operating systems Note The printer cannot be used over a LocalTalk network Compatible with EtherTalk Phase 2 The imagePROGRAF printer driver is not compatible with AppleTalk Printing over a NetWare network Compatible servers Novell NetWare 4 2 5 1 6 0 Compatible clients Windows 2000 Professional or Server Windows XP Professional Compatible computer A computer th...

Page 968: ...tosh network In Macintosh networks print over AppleTalk EtherTalk or TCP IP using Bonjour Zeroconf functions Note The imagePROGRAF printer driver is not compatible with AppleTalk Example of a NetWare network Network Setting Network Setting Network Environment iPF8300 10 950 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 969: ... off and on This is because an IP address different from before has been assigned Thus when using DHCP server functions consult your network administrator and configure the settings in one of the following ways Configure the setting for dynamic DNS updating In the printer menu either set DNS Dync update to On or activate the setting Enable DNS Dynamic Update in RemoteUI See Menu Settings P 912 See...

Page 970: ... The minimum value is 0 after which 9 is dis played Hold down or to increase or decrease the value continuously Make sure the IP address you enter for the printer is not the same as any computer IP address in your network 10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 to complete the settings and then press the OK button 11 Press the Menu button If you have changed the settings a confirmation message is displayed Press ...

Page 971: ...river and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select MAC Address and then press the OK button Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button You can investigate the MAC address by printing an interface setting report See Printing Interface Setting Reports P 928 2 In Windows open a command prompt or in Mac OS X start Terminal 3 Execute the following command to add entrie...

Page 972: ...When printing in a TCP IPv6 network you must configure the TCP IPv6 settings on the Control Panel Follow the steps below to configure the TCP IPv6 network settings 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Settings Adj tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select ...

Page 973: ...ion and cancel print jobs By factory default the English screen is displayed To change the display language select the desired lan guage under Language before logging on in administrator mode If you login in Administrator Mode you can configure to use the Jumbo Frame function in the Network page However this function might not be able to be used depending on the network environment Important Use N...

Page 974: ... IP address Off Enable DNS Dy namic Update Activate this setting to perform DNS server registration automati cally Off Use Zeroconf Func tion Activate this setting to use Bonjour On IP Address Specify the printer s IP address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask Specify the printer s subnet mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway Address Specify the printer s default gateway 0 0 0 0 LPD Printing Activate this setting to use LDP Prin...

Page 975: ...ify to configure the IP address using DHCP BOOTP or RARP the IP address obtained by this method is used first If you cannot obtain the IP address the address specified in IP Address is used It takes up to two minutes to determine whether DHCP BOOTP or RARP are available We recommend clearing check boxes of options you will not use If you are using a DNS server select Enable DNS Dynamic Update and ...

Page 976: ...cters 1 63 characters Use single byte letters numbers and hyphens Do not use numbers or for the first charac ter or for the last character NB 18GBip6xxxxxx DNS Domain Name Specify the printer domain name up to 63 characters Use single byte letters numbers hyphens and pe riods Do not use numbers or for the first charac ter or or for the last character blank Perform dynamic updating of stateful addr...

Page 977: ...isplayed when you click the Change Password button in the Security group Device Information Settings Item Details Default Setting Device Name Enter a device name 0 32 characters blank Location Enter the location where the device is installed 0 32 characters blank Administrator Enter the administrator s name 0 32 characters blank Phone Enter the administrator s contact information 0 32 characters b...

Page 978: ...en press the OK button The display reverts to the Ethernet Driver menu 7 Press or to select Comm Mode and then press the OK button 8 Press or to select the communication mode and then press the OK button The display reverts to the Ethernet Driver menu 9 Press or to select Ethernet Type and then press the OK button 10 Press or to select the Ethernet type and then press the OK button The display rev...

Page 979: ...on to set up email recipients and message timing Besides being informed of finished print jobs or errors you can also complete settings for email notification when service is needed or it s time to replace consumables For detailed instructions see Specifying Printer Related Information P 959 Note For details on email notification using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor in Windows refer to the image PROG...

Page 980: ...printer IP address or name Example http xxx xxx xxx xxx 2 Select Administrator Mode and click Logon 3 If a password has been set on the printer enter the password 4 Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page 5 Click Reset to Default settings in the lower right corner of the Network Interface group 6 After confirming the message click OK to restore the network sett...

Page 981: ...ss on the Printer P 951 1 Open the Printers and Faxes or Printers window 2 Right click the icon of this printer and choose Properties to open the printer properties window 3 Click the Port tab to display the Port sheet 4 Click Add Port to display the Printer Ports dialog box 5 In the Available Port list select Standard TCP IP Port 6 Click New Port After the wizard starts a window is displayed for ...

Page 982: ...is setting to use NCP Burst Mode This mode supports fast data transfer when printing in queue server mode Normally leave the setting On On Print Application Choose the print service Bindery PServer RPrinter NDS PServer NPrinter NDS PSer ver Packet Signature Select If Requested by Server to use packet signature If Reques ted by Server Bindery PServer File Server Name Specify the name of a file serv...

Page 983: ...ter s Frame Type To enable communication between the printer and computers on your network specify the Ethernet frame type in your Net Ware environment Follow these steps to specify the frame type by using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility or the printer Control Panel Note You can specify the frame type by using RemoteUI if the printer s IP address is configured Important Before specifying the fra...

Page 984: ... the Printer menu 4 Click the NetWare tab and select the frame type in the NetWare Frame Type list Network Setting Network Setting Windows Specifying the Printer s Frame Type iPF8300 10 966 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 985: ... Address Important You must specify the IP address here to be able to configure NetWare protocol settings using Remo teUI 6 Click Set 7 Click OK after the Confirmation message is displayed 8 Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility Network Setting Network Setting Windows iPF8300 Specifying the Printer s Frame Type 10 967 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 986: ...nd then press the OK button The display reverts to the NetWare menu 7 Press or to select Frame Type and then press the OK button 8 Press or to select the frame type to use and then press the OK button The display reverts to the NetWare menu 9 Press or to select Print Service and then press the OK button 10 Press or to select the desired print service and then press the OK button The display revert...

Page 987: ...or details on configuring NDPS refer to the NetWare documentation NDS Novell Directory Service and bindery NDS and bindery are both supported Use the mode that is compatible with your network environment Queue server mode and remote printer mode Queue server mode and remote printer mode are both supported Queue server mode When using queue server mode all print server functions are supported so th...

Page 988: ...s assigned printer number 0 When using the printer in queue server mode do not change the printer number from 0 3 Set a password 1 Right click the print server created in step 2 and choose Details 2 Click Change Password to open the password input dialog box Enter the password 3 Click OK to close the password input dialog box 4 Click OK or Cancel to close the details dialog box 4 To use the printe...

Page 989: ...lay the dialog box for confirming that PCONSOLE is finished 7 Click Yes to exit PCONSOLE Specifying NetWare Protocols Follow the steps below to configure NetWare protocol settings other than the frame type by using RemoteUI Note For details on RemoteUI see Using RemoteUI P 955 1 Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location or Address box to display the RemoteUI page http print...

Page 990: ... Specifying NetWare Print Services P 969 2 In Printer Number enter the same printer number specified in Specifying NetWare Print Serv ices P 969 If you have selected NDS PServer Queue Server Mode Using an NDS Print Server 1 In Tree Name and Context Name enter the tree and context name of the print server 2 In Print Server Name enter the name of the print server created in Specifying NetWare Print ...

Page 991: ... each computer to be used for printing over the network and log in to the Net Ware server or tree For instructions on connection refer to the NetWare and operating system documentation 5 Install the printer driver Follow the instructions of your network administrator to install the printer driver on each computer to be used for printing When installing the printer driver choose Network Printer as ...

Page 992: ... the RemoteUI page http printer IP address or name Example http xxx xxx xxx xxx 2 Select Administrator Mode and click Logon 3 If a password has been set on the printer enter the password 4 Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page 5 Click Edit in the upper right corner of the AppleTalk group to display the Edit AppleTalk Protocol Settings page 6 Refer to the Appl...

Page 993: ...on on zone names 7 Click OK to display the Network page Configuring the Destination for AppleTalk Networks To print over an AppleTalk network activate the AppleTalk protocol and configure the destination as follows Activating AppleTalk on the printer Important By default the AppleTalk protocol is disabled on the printer 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Sett...

Page 994: ...I see Using RemoteUI P 955 Configuring the Destination Mac OS X Important AppleTalk is supported in Mac OS X 10 2 8 10 4 Note The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10 4 The method of configuring the destination varies depending on the version of Mac OS X The imagePROGRAF printer driver is not compatible with AppleTalk 1 In System Preferences click Network to display the Network window Net...

Page 995: ...etwork Important If you use the printer in a TCP IP network make sure the printer s IP address is configured correctly See Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel P 951 Configuring the Destination Mac OS X 1 Navigate to Applications Canon Utilities imagePROGRAF PrinterSetup and double click imagePROGRAF PrinterSetup app Network Setting Network Setting Mac OS X iPF8300 Configurin...

Page 996: ...ress 4 Select the model and type and then enter the IP address before clicking the Next button Network Setting Network Setting Mac OS X Configuring the Destination in TCP IP Networks iPF8300 10 978 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 997: ...ake sure the computer and printer are on the same network For information about net work settings ask your network administrator By default Bonjour is activated on the printer You can activate or deactivate the Bonjour function or change the printer name by using RemoteUI For instructions on changing it see Using RemoteUI P 955 1 Navigate to Applications Canon Utilities imagePROGRAF PrinterSetup a...

Page 998: ... register and click Next 4 Complete Printer Name and Location as desired and click Register Network Setting Network Setting Mac OS X Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network iPF8300 10 980 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 999: ...5 Click Finish Network Setting Network Setting Mac OS X iPF8300 Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network 10 981 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1000: ...aintenance Ink Tanks 983 Printheads 998 Cutter Unit 1011 Maintenance Cartridge 1015 Cleaning the Printer 1026 Other Maintenance 1031 Maintenance iPF8300 11 982 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1001: ...304Y M Ink Tank PFI 304M PM Ink Tank PFI 304PM R Ink Tank PFI 304R G Ink Tank PFI 304G B Ink Tank PFI 304B PGY Ink Tank PFI 304PGY GY Ink Tank PFI 304GY BK Ink Tank PFI 304BK 700 ml 23 7 fl oz PC Ink Tank PFI 704PC C Ink Tank PFI 704C MBK Ink Tank PFI 704MBK Y Ink Tank PFI 704Y M Ink Tank PFI 704M PM Ink Tank PFI 704PM R Ink Tank PFI 704R G Ink Tank PFI 704G B Ink Tank PFI 704B PGY Ink Tank PFI 70...

Page 1002: ... install used ink tanks in another model of printer This will prevent correct ink level detection which may damage the printer or cause other problems We recommend using up an Ink Tank in the course of printing within six months after breaking the seal Printing quality may be affected if you use older ink tanks Do not leave the printer without ink tanks installed for extended periods a month or mo...

Page 1003: ...e printer or during printhead cleaning Note Ink Tank replacement is possible even during printing when print jobs are being canceled or when paper is being advanced Access the menu for Ink Tank replacement 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Ink tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Ink Menu is di...

Page 1004: ... the printer gently when replacing tanks 2 Lift the stopper a of the Ink Tank Lock Lever for the color to replace Lift the Ink Tank Lock Lever until it stops and then push it down to the front Important Push the Ink Tank Lock Lever down until it locks Make sure the Ink Tank Lock Lever does not return to the original position Maintenance Ink Tanks Replacing Ink Tanks iPF8300 11 986 Downloaded from ...

Page 1005: ...leak and cause stains Put the ink tanks in a plastic bag and seal it Note Dispose of used ink tanks according to local regulations Remove the Ink Tank 700 ml 1 Open the Ink Tank Cover of the tank for replacement and check the Ink Lamp The Ink Lamp flashes quickly if there is no ink left Maintenance Ink Tanks iPF8300 Replacing Ink Tanks 11 987 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1006: ...Lift the Ink Tank Lock Lever until it stops and then push it down to the front Important Push the Ink Tank Lock Lever down until it locks Make sure the Ink Tank Lock Lever does not return to the original position 3 Hold the Ink Tank by the handle a and remove it Press the OK button Maintenance Ink Tanks Replacing Ink Tanks iPF8300 11 988 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1007: ...e Ink Tank 330 ml 1 Before opening the pouch tilt the Ink Tank to the left and right gently seven or eight times Caution Do not remove and agitate ink tanks that have already been installed in the printer Ink may leak out Important If you do not agitate the Ink Tank the ink may settle which may affect printing quality Maintenance Ink Tanks iPF8300 Replacing Ink Tanks 11 989 Downloaded from Manuals...

Page 1008: ... shown with the ink holes down Important Ink tanks cannot be loaded in the holder if the color or orientation is incorrect If the Ink Tank does not fit in the holder do not force it into the holder Make sure the color of the Ink Tank Lock Lever matches the color of the Ink Tank and check the orientation of the Ink Tank before reloading it Maintenance Ink Tanks Replacing Ink Tanks iPF8300 11 990 Do...

Page 1009: ...n until it clicks into place 5 Make sure the Ink Lamp is lit in red Note If the Ink Lamp is not lit in red reload the tank Ink lamps flash when there is little ink left Maintenance Ink Tanks iPF8300 Replacing Ink Tanks 11 991 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1010: ...Ink Tank with both hands and tilt it to the left and right as shown shaking gently it seven or eight times Caution 700 ml ink tanks are heavy so use your whole arm to agitate it instead of just your wrist Do not remove and agitate ink tanks that have already been installed in the printer Ink may leak out Important If you do not agitate the Ink Tank the ink may settle which may affect printing qual...

Page 1011: ... shown with the ink holes down Important Ink tanks cannot be loaded in the holder if the color or orientation is incorrect If the Ink Tank does not fit in the holder do not force it into the holder Make sure the color of the Ink Tank Lock Lever matches the color of the Ink Tank and check the orientation of the Ink Tank before reloading it Maintenance Ink Tanks iPF8300 Replacing Ink Tanks 11 993 Do...

Page 1012: ...n until it clicks into place 5 Make sure the Ink Lamp is lit in red Note If the Ink Lamp is not lit in red reload the tank Ink lamps flash when there is little ink left Maintenance Ink Tanks Replacing Ink Tanks iPF8300 11 994 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1013: ...Ink Tank is installed as when moving the printer push the release lever a as shown while returning the Ink Tank Lock Lever to the original position Checking Ink Tank Levels On the Display Screen you can check how much ink is left in the ink tanks To check remaining Ink Tank levels access the Tab Selection screen on the Control Panel and press or to select the Ink tab Maintenance Ink Tanks iPF8300 ...

Page 1014: ... below If the Display Screen indicates to replace the Ink Tank replace the Ink Tank If a message is displayed indicating to check the remaining ink levels or after tasks that consume a lot of ink such as large format printing or head cleaning check the remaining levels and replace Ink Tank as needed See Replacing Ink Tanks P 984 When to Replace Ink Tanks Replace or prepare to replace ink tanks in ...

Page 1015: ...eplace or prepare to replace the Ink Tank before maintenance If a message for ink replacement is shown on the Display Screen When ink runs out the Message Lamp flashes a message regarding Ink Tank replacement is shown on the Display Screen and printing is disabled Replace the Ink Tank at this point Maintenance Ink Tanks iPF8300 When to Replace Ink Tanks 11 997 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Ma...

Page 1016: ...thead nozzles are clear by printing a test pattern to check the nozzles Note Nozzles are periodically checked to ensure they are clear Configure the settings on the Control Panel menu in Nozzle Check See Menu Settings P 912 1 Load unused paper Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls P 774 Loading Rolls in the Printer P 777 Loading Sheets in the Printer P 802 2 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control...

Page 1017: ...omplete follow the steps below and check again for nozzle clogging 1 Clean the Printhead See Cleaning the Printhead P 999 2 Print a test pattern to check the nozzles Note If you repeat these steps several times but the horizontal lines are still faint or incomplete contact your Canon dealer Cleaning the Printhead If printing is faint cleaning the Printhead may improve results Choose one of two Pri...

Page 1018: ...splayed 3 Press or to select Maintenance and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select Head Cleaning and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select Head Cleaning A or Head Cleaning B and then press the OK button Head cleaning is now executed 6 Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and determine whether cleaning has cleared the nozzles See Checking for Nozzle Clogging P 998 Replacing the...

Page 1019: ...rtant Do not open the Printhead pouch until immediately before installation After removing the Printhead from the pouch install it right away If the Printhead is left after the pouch is opened the nozzles may dry out which may affect printing quality Access the menu for Printhead replacement Caution When replacing the Printhead immediately after printing wait a few minutes before replacing it The ...

Page 1020: ...rinthead for replacement Select Printhead L when replacing the left printhead Printhead R when replacing the right printhead and L R Printheads when replacing both Make sure your selection is correct 8 Press the OK button Ink is now filled After about three minutes a message is shown on the Display Screen instructing you to open the Top Cover Replace the Printhead 1 Open the Top Cover Instructions...

Page 1021: ...letely to wipe it clean Important Do not touch the Linear Scale a Carriage Shaft b or Fixed Blade c Never touch the metal contacts of the Carriage This may damage the printer Maintenance Printheads iPF8300 Replacing the Printhead 11 1003 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1022: ...pletely to wipe it clean If the Carriage is obscuring the ventilation duct move the Carriage manually before cleaning the duct 4 Pull up the Carriage Cover to open it completely Maintenance Printheads Replacing the Printhead iPF8300 11 1004 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1023: ...ad Fixer Lever forward all the way to open it completely 6 Pull up the Printhead Fixer Cover to open it completely Maintenance Printheads iPF8300 Replacing the Printhead 11 1005 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1024: ...n Note Dispose of the used Printhead in accordance with local regulations 8 Holding the new Printhead by the grips a remove it from the pouch Maintenance Printheads Replacing the Printhead iPF8300 11 1006 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1025: ...ueeze the grips c of Protective Part b and pull it down to remove it Important The inside surface of the Protective Part a and Protective Part b is coated with ink to protect the nozzles Be careful not to touch these surfaces when removing the caps The Printhead contains ink to protect the nozzles We recommend removing Protective Part b as you hold it over the Printhead package or safely out of th...

Page 1026: ...he Carriage Carefully push the printhead firmly into the Carriage ensuring that the nozzles and metal contacts do not touch the carriage 11 Pull the Printhead Fixer Cover down toward the front to lock the Printhead in place Maintenance Printheads Replacing the Printhead iPF8300 11 1008 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1027: ...head Fixer Lever toward the back of the printer until it clicks 13 Push the Carriage Cover down toward the front Maintenance Printheads iPF8300 Replacing the Printhead 11 1009 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1028: ...ighten Lines and Colors Head Posi Adj P 839 15 Follow the instructions on the Display Screen and supply paper that you will use for printing After the paper is advanced Head Posi Adj will be executed automatically See Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors Head Posi Adj P 839 Note When printing fine lines or text at high precision on glossy or semi glossy photo or proofing paper set t...

Page 1029: ... the Settings Adj tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Maintenance and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select Change Cutter and then press the OK button The Carriage moves to the center and a message on the Display Screen requests you to open the Top Cover Note If you do not respo...

Page 1030: ...is dirty use a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely to wipe it clean Important Do not touch the Linear Scale a Carriage Shaft b or Fixed Blade c Maintenance Cutter Unit Replacing the Cutter Unit iPF8300 11 1012 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1031: ... used Cutter Unit in accordance with local regulations Do not disassemble the Cutter Unit Touching the blade may cause injury 9 Holding the new Cutter Unit by the Lock Lever a and grip b insert it on the Carriage until it clicks into place c Important After installing the Cutter Unit hold it only by the grip b and pull the Cutter Unit forward to make sure it does not come off It may damage the pri...

Page 1032: ...lock Press or to select Yes and then press the OK button 13 The Carriage is moved and a confirmation message is displayed about resetting the cut count To reset the cut counter press or to select Yes and then press the OK button Maintenance Cutter Unit Replacing the Cutter Unit iPF8300 11 1014 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1033: ... handling the Maintenance Cartridge Take the following precautions when handling the Maintenance Cartridge Caution For safety keep the Maintenance Cartridge out of the reach of children If ink is accidentally ingested contact a physician immediately To prevent ink from leaking from a used Maintenance Cartridge avoid dropping the cartridge or storing it at an angle Otherwise ink may leak and cause ...

Page 1034: ...ing on the printer dur ing Printhead cleaning or when ink is being absorbed Ink may leak out Access the menu for Maintenance Cartridge replacement 1 On the Tab Selection screen of the Control Panel press or to select the Settings Adj tab Note If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Maintenance and t...

Page 1035: ...aintenance cartridges are heavy Always grasp the cartridge firmly and keep the cartridge lev el during removal and storage If you drop a used Maintenance Cartridge or store it at an angle ink may leak and cause stains Important The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is recorded on each printer Do not install a used Maintenance Cartridge in another printer Maintenance Maintenance Cartridge iP...

Page 1036: ...This may damage the Maintenance Cartridge 4 Attach the packaging material to the used Maintenance Cartridge and put it in the box Keep it level as you put it in the plastic bag Expel excess air from the plastic bag and seal the zipper Maintenance Maintenance Cartridge Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge iPF8300 11 1018 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1037: ...d ongoing environmental programs Canon supports recycling of used maintenance cartridges Follow the instructions provided with the new Maintenance Cartridge that describe how to process the used Maintenance Cartridge 6 Wipe away any soiling on the Maintenance Cartridge Cover Important Support the Maintenance Cartridge Cover from underneath as you wipe it Maintenance Maintenance Cartridge iPF8300 R...

Page 1038: ...lizes the Maintenance Cartridge Next replace the Shaft Cleaner Replacing the Shaft Cleaner Replace the Shaft Cleaner when you replace the Maintenance Cartridge New Shaft Cleaner is included with replacement Maintenance Cartridge Maintenance Maintenance Cartridge Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge iPF8300 11 1020 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1039: ...tion screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Maintenance and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select Repl S Cleaner and then press the OK button After the Carriage is moved the Display Screen indicates Open Upper Cover 5 Open the Top Cover Note If you do not respond within two minutes shaft cleaner replacement is ...

Page 1040: ...e by the grips a and pull it to the right to remove it Important Do not touch the Linear Scale a Carriage Shaft b or Fixed Blade c Maintenance Maintenance Cartridge Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge iPF8300 11 1022 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1041: ...Shaft Cleaner in the small box before putting it in the larger box with the used Maintenance Cartridge for disposal 8 Close the Top Cover The Carriage moves back into position Maintenance Maintenance Cartridge iPF8300 Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge 11 1023 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1042: ...rtridge capacity and prepare a new Maintenance Cartridge as needed See Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge P 1015 When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge Replace or prepare to replace the Maintenance Cartridge in the following situations If a message for checking the Maintenance Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen When the Maintenance Cartridge is almost full the Message Lamp is lit and The...

Page 1043: ...n When the Maintenance Cartridge is full the Message Lamp flashes and a message to replace the Maintenance Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen Printing is disabled and you cannot replace the Printhead or transfer the printer Replace the Maintenance Cartridge with a new one Maintenance Maintenance Cartridge iPF8300 When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge 11 1025 Downloaded from ManualsPrinte...

Page 1044: ...pe away any dirt or paper dust from the Paper Feed Slot a power cord plug and so on Dry these parts with a dry cloth Caution Never use flammable solvents such as alcohol benzene or thinner If these substances come into con tact with electrical components inside the printer there is a risk of fire or electrical shock Important If the Ejection Guide is dirty it may soil the edge of the paper when th...

Page 1045: ...dust If the message Blue platen switch is dirty is displayed Important If the Platen inside the Top Cover becomes dirty it may soil the underside of paper We recommend cleaning the Platen after borderless printing or printing on small paper If the Ejection Guide is dirty it may soil the edge of the paper when the paper is cut We recommend clean ing the Ejection Guide even if it does not appear dir...

Page 1046: ...rinting Ink Grooves b or on the cutter guide c use the Cleaning Brush d provided with the printer to wipe it away Note If the Cleaning Brush is dirty rinse it in water Maintenance Cleaning the Printer Cleaning Inside the Top Cover iPF8300 11 1028 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1047: ...ler a all over the Platen b on the Paper Retain er c the Borderless Printing Ink Grooves d the Ejection Guide e the cutter guide f around the ink suction holes at left g around the Borderless Printing Ink Grooves at right h on the blue Switch i and so on Maintenance Cleaning the Printer iPF8300 Cleaning Inside the Top Cover 11 1029 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1048: ... use flammable solvents such as alcohol benzene or thinner If these substances come into con tact with electrical components inside the printer there is a risk of fire or electrical shock Do not touch the clear sheet on the side of the Top Cover Roller This may damage the roller 4 Close the Top Cover Maintenance Cleaning the Printer Cleaning Inside the Top Cover iPF8300 11 1030 Downloaded from Man...

Page 1049: ...Replace the Maintenance Cartridge before transfer prepara tions See Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge P 1015 Depending on the state of the printer part replacement may be necessary when preparing to transfer the printer that is when you execute the printer menu item to prepare for transfer Ink must be drained before Level 2 or Level 3 printer transfer as described in the following table Prepare ...

Page 1050: ...ss the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Prep MovePrinter and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select the level of transfer and then press the OK button 5 Press or to select Execute and then press the OK button to display the confirmation screen 6 Press or to select Yes and then press the OK button The printer is now prepared for transfer Level 1 Once preparations ...

Page 1051: ...s message is displayed press the OK button and contact your Canon dealer for assistance Remove the Ink Tank 1 Open the left and right ink tank covers 2 Lift the stopper a of the Ink Tank Lock Lever a Lift the Ink Tank Lock Lever until it stops and then push it down to the front Maintenance Other Maintenance iPF8300 Preparing to Transfer the Printer 11 1033 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manual...

Page 1052: ...re the Ink Tank you removed in the box with the ink holes a facing up Otherwise ink may leak and cause stains 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to remove all ink tanks Maintenance Other Maintenance Preparing to Transfer the Printer iPF8300 11 1034 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1053: ...is point ink is drawn out from inside the tubes Important Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge during this process When the process is finished Preparations for moving the printer finished Turn the power off is displayed Maintenance Other Maintenance iPF8300 Preparing to Transfer the Printer 11 1035 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1054: ...ccidentally unplug the printer plug it in again reinstall the ink tanks and follow this procedure again 2 Disconnect the power cord interface cable and Media Take up Unit Power Inlet 3 Open the Top Cover and lift the Ejection Guide 4 Remove the four ejection supports and lower the Ejection Guide Maintenance Other Maintenance Preparing to Transfer the Printer iPF8300 11 1036 Downloaded from Manuals...

Page 1055: ...t it between the Belt Stopper and affix the Belt Stopper with a hex screw at the position indica ted Maintenance Other Maintenance iPF8300 Preparing to Transfer the Printer 11 1037 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1056: ...e the Top Cover 7 Tape down printer covers to secure them in the reverse order of tape removal during installation 8 If the Output Stacker is installed reverse the installation procedure to remove the Output Stacker 9 Remove the Stand by reversing the installation procedure when it was attached to the printer Maintenance Other Maintenance Preparing to Transfer the Printer iPF8300 11 1038 Downloade...

Page 1057: ... If the Tab Selection screen is not displayed press the Menu button 2 Press the OK button The Set Adj Menu is displayed 3 Press or to select Printer Info and then press the OK button 4 Press or to select System Info and then press the OK button The firmware version is displayed Updating the Firmware To obtain the latest firmware visit the Canon website If the firmware available online is newer tha...

Page 1058: ...r 1043 Printing does not start 1054 The printer stops during a print job 1056 Problems with the printing quality 1057 Cannot print over a network 1069 Installation problems 1071 Other problems 1073 Troubleshooting iPF8300 12 1040 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1059: ...g You can wait until ink dries before cutting the roll and you can cut rolls at a desired posi tion Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls P 794 How do I print without borders Borderless printing is possible on rolls You can also specify borderless printing in the print er driver by adjusting the original size to match the paper size Before borderless printing set the blue Switch on the platen to...

Page 1060: ...sier to see Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing P 51 How do I modify how colors are printed You can adjust colors as desired in the printer driver before printing Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver P 42 How do I use printer driver settings again in subsequent jobs By saving settings information in a favorite you can apply the settings again before printing...

Page 1061: ... rotating 1052 The size of clear film cannot be detected 1053 Margins are wide 1053 Clearing Jammed Roll Paper If roll paper jams follow the steps below to remove jams 1 Turn the printer off See Turning the Printer On and Off P 893 2 Open the Top Cover 3 If the Carriage is out move the Carriage out of the way away from the paper Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper iPF8300 Clearing Jammed Roll...

Page 1062: ...o pinch your fingers between the Carriage and Platen if you have push ed the Carriage to the left edge or if a paper jam occurs during cutting Important Do not touch the Linear Scale a Carriage Shaft b or Fixed Blade c Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper Clearing Jammed Roll Paper iPF8300 12 1044 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1063: ...rd the front Use scissors or a cutting tool to cut away the printed or wrinkled portion Caution When cutting paper be careful to avoid injury or damage to the printer Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper iPF8300 Clearing Jammed Roll Paper 12 1045 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1064: ...u gently pull it evenly to the position of the Ejection Guide a Align the right side of the roll paper with the Paper Alignment Line b keeping this side parallel to the line and then lower the Release Lever Important Do not force the roll paper into alignment with the Paper Alignment Line b This may prevent the paper from being advanced straight Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper Clearing Ja...

Page 1065: ...s the Feed button 2 Hold down the button to advance the paper 3 Press the Cut button and then select Yes to cut the edge See Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls P 794 Clearing a Jammed Sheet If a sheet jams follow the steps below to remove it 1 Turn the printer off See Turning the Printer On and Off P 893 2 Open the Top Cover Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper iPF8300 Clearing a Jammed S...

Page 1066: ...ration to cut the paper Be careful not to pinch your fingers between the Carriage and Platen if you have push ed the Carriage to the left edge or if a paper jam occurs during cutting Important Do not touch the Linear Scale a Carriage Shaft b or Fixed Blade c Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper Clearing a Jammed Sheet iPF8300 12 1048 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1067: ...and pull it out toward the front 6 If the paper is not visible lift the Ejection Guide remove the Roll Holder and clear the paper jam from below Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper iPF8300 Clearing a Jammed Sheet 12 1049 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1068: ...il it stops Important Always move the Carriage to the right side If the Carriage is on the left a Carriage error may occur when you turn on the printer 8 Lower the Release Lever and close the Top Cover 9 Turn the printer on See Turning the Printer On and Off P 893 Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper Clearing a Jammed Sheet iPF8300 12 1050 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1069: ...it is not installed correctly Reinstall the Cutter Unit correctly See Replacing the Cutter Unit P 1011 The Cutter Unit blade is worn out Replace the Cutter Unit See Replacing the Cutter Unit P 1011 Cut Speed is not configured correctly in the Control Panel menu Change the Cut Speed setting in the Control Panel menu See Menu Structure P 904 Paper is not cut Cause Corrective Action In the printer dr...

Page 1070: ...is not connected to the Right Media Take up Unit correctly Reconnect the Media Take up Sensor cord as follows 1 Turn the printer off 2 Disconnect the Media Take up Sensor cord from the Right Media Take up Unit and reconnect it firmly all the way in 3 Turn the printer on See Using the Media Take up Unit Optional P 821 If the Media Take up Unit con tinues rotating contact your Canon dealer for assis...

Page 1071: ...laten See Cleaning Inside the Top Cover P 1026 Margins are wide Cause Corrective Action Rolls are advanced a specific amount before cutting to prevent problems with cutting and paper ejection This operation is normal Troubleshooting Problems Regarding Paper iPF8300 The size of clear film cannot be detected 12 1053 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1072: ... Printers window 2 Clear Pause Printing in the File menu to restart the print job In Mac OS X restart the print job as follows 1 Click Print Fax This is identified as Printer Setup Utility in some ver sions of Mac OS X 2 Select the printer and then Start Jobs in the Printers menu to restart the print job The printer does not respond even if print jobs are sent Cause Corrective Action In the Contro...

Page 1073: ...e wait until ink agitation is finished The time for agitation varies depending on how long the printer was off Between about a minute and a half to twenty minutes Troubleshooting Printing does not start iPF8300 The display screen indicates Agitating 12 1055 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1074: ...r ejects blank unprinted paper Status Corrective Action The leading edge of the roll paper was cut to straighten it The leading edge of rolls may be cut to straighten it if you have selected Trim Edge First On or Automatic in the Control Panel menu See Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically P 799 The Printhead nozzles are clogged Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and make sur...

Page 1075: ...as left with out ink tanks installed for some time ink has become clogged in the ink supply system After the ink tanks have been installed for 24 hours run Head Cleaning B from the Control Panel See Cleaning the Printhead P 999 Paper is jammed inside the Top Cover Follow the steps below to remove the jammed piece of paper inside the Top Cov er 1 Open the Top Cover and make sure the Carriage is not...

Page 1076: ...VacuumStrngth P 852 See Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images Head Height P 843 When printing on CAD Tracing Paper or other film based media choose a Vac uumStrngth setting of Standard Strong or Strongest in the Control Panel menu If rubbing still occurs in the Control Panel menu use a higher Head Height setting See Adjusting the Vacuum Strength VacuumStrngth P 852 See Troubleshooting P...

Page 1077: ...acuumStrngth setting of Strong or Strongest in the Control Panel menu If rubbing still occurs in the Control Panel menu use a higher Head Height setting See Adjusting the Vacuum Strength VacuumStrngth P 852 See Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images Head Height P 843 When printing on CAD Tracing Paper or other film based media choose a Vac uumStrngth setting of Standard Strong or Stronge...

Page 1078: ...o the computer and monitor documenta tion to adjust the colors Adjust the settings of the color management soft ware referring to the software documentation as needed The Printhead nozzles are clogged Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if they are clogged See Checking for Nozzle Clogging P 998 In the Windows printer driver Application Color Matching Pri ority is not selected Click S...

Page 1079: ...traighten Lines and Colors Head Posi Adj P 839 The Printhead nozzles are clogged Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if they are clogged See Checking for Nozzle Clogging P 998 Streaks may occur if you set the Print Quality too low Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the Advanced Settings of the print er driver and try printing again Printing in Draft or Standard mode is faster ...

Page 1080: ... for Print ing P 51 The Printhead is out of alignment Adjust the Printhead alignment See Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors Head Posi Adj P 839 Allowing printed documents to dry on top of each other may cause un even colors To avoid uneven colors we recommend drying each sheet separately Density may be uneven if you use Glossy Paper or Coated Paper In Advanced Settings of the prin...

Page 1081: ...button and stop printing 2 Change the type of paper in the printer driver and try printing again Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen If printed documents exhibit the following symptoms adjust the setting of the blue Switch on the Platen Image edges are blurred Image edges are affected by white banding Important Always set the blue Switch on the Platen to the side for borderless printing Printing...

Page 1082: ... 4 Using the back of the Cleaning Brush move the first Switch to the side opposite Troubleshooting Problems with the printing quality Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen iPF8300 12 1064 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1083: ...or A1 8 914 mm 36 in 9 1 030 mm JIS B0 or B1 10 1 067 mm 42 in 11 1 117 mm 44 in 6 Using the back of the Cleaning Brush move the Switch to the side opposite corresponding to the size of the paper for printing In this case note that you will move the switch in the opposite direction from the direction in step 4 Troubleshooting Problems with the printing quality iPF8300 Setting the Blue Switch on th...

Page 1084: ...d images is inaccurate in the feeding direction Cause Corrective Action In the Control Panel menu Adj Priority is set to Print Quality Set Adj Priority to Print Length in the Control Panel menu and then ex ecute Adjust Length See Adjusting the Feed Amount P 845 The type of paper specified in the printer driver does not match the type loaded in the printer Load paper of the same type as you have sp...

Page 1085: ...u of the source application and fol low these steps to print 1 Clear the option Open Preview When Print Job Starts on the Main sheet 2 Clear the option Page Layout on the Layout sheet 3 Click the Special Settings button on the Layout sheet to display the Special Settings dialog box and then clear the option Fast Graphic Process The blue Switch on the platen is set incorrectly Move the Switch numbe...

Page 1086: ...inthead height before aligning the printhead See Enhancing Printing Quality P 837 In the Control Panel menu use a lower Head Height setting See Troubleshooting Paper Abrasion and Blurry Images Head Height P 843 The type of paper specified in the printer driver does not match the type loaded in the printer Load paper of the same type as you have specified in the printer driver See Loading Rolls in ...

Page 1087: ... cable Check the communication mode with the hub Although the printer normally detects the hub communication mode and transmission rate automatically in auto negotiation mode sometimes the hub settings cannot be detected In this case configure the connection method manually specifying the communication mode in use See Configuring the Communication Mode Manually P 960 Cannot print over a TCP IP net...

Page 1088: ...smission to a printer on another subnet fails deactivate NCP burst mode in that printer s network protocol settings 5 If the printer is used in queue server mode specify Other Unknown as the printer type Cannot print over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks Cause Corrective Action The AppleTalk protocol is not enabled on the printer Activate AppleTalk on the printer See Configuring the Printer s AppleTa...

Page 1089: ...Exit Removing printer drivers and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor Macintosh Remove the printer driver or imagePROGRAF Printmonitor as follows 1 Insert the User Software CD ROM provided with the printer in the CD ROM drive 2 Start the printer driver installer included in the User Software CD ROM Open the OS X folder and double click iPF Driver Installer X 3 In the upper left menu choose Uninstall and the...

Page 1090: ... start menu select Programs imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility Uninstaller image PROGRAF Device Setup Utility to start the wizard 2 In the wizard window click Delete and then click Next 3 Follow the instructions on the screen to remove imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility Troubleshooting Installation problems Removing Installed Printer Drivers iPF8300 12 1072 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals...

Page 1091: ...ce that conforms to the printer specifications See Specifications P 942 The printer takes time to start up Cause Corrective Action The printer may have shut down incorrectly last time This may happen after power outages or if the printer is unplugged before it is turned off In this case the next time power is restored the printer s hard disk is checked and startup may take some time Please wait a ...

Page 1092: ...leared Cause Corrective Action The printer has not detected the new Maintenance Cartridge that was used to replace the old one Remove the new Maintenance Cartridge you have just installed and insert it again firmly Restart the printer The printer consumes a lot of ink Cause Corrective Action Many full page color images are printed In print jobs such as photos images are filled with color This cons...

Page 1093: ...ter ink level detection has been released this function cannot be reactivated for currently loaded Ink Tank To use ink level detection again replace the Ink Tank with new ones specified for use with the printer Repeatedly removing and inserting an Ink Tank may damage the connection between the Ink Tank and the printer which may cause ink leakage from the Ink Tank and damage the printer Releasing i...

Page 1094: ...nd then press the OK button 6 Check the message and press the button 7 Check the message and press the button 8 Press or to select Yes and then press the OK button Troubleshooting Other problems Ink Level Detection iPF8300 12 1076 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1095: ...on the Display Screen After checking the mes sage press the button 10 Press or to select Yes and then press the OK button Ink level detection is now released Troubleshooting Other problems iPF8300 Ink Level Detection 12 1077 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1096: ...arding ink 1094 Messages regarding printing or adjustment 1097 Messages regarding printheads 1100 Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge 1102 Messages regarding the hard disk 1104 Other Messages 1106 Error Message iPF8300 13 1078 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1097: ...dware error xxxxxxxx xxxx x represents a letter or number 1106 Ink insufficient 1094 Ink tank is empty 1095 Insufficient paper for job 1085 Mail box full Delete unwanted data 1105 Mail box full Now printing without saving data 1104 Mail box nearly full 1105 Maint cart The level is low 1102 Maintenance cartridge full 1102 Maintenance cartridge problem 1103 Maximum jobs stored 1105 Media take up uni...

Page 1098: ... are loaded 1087 Roll printing is selected 1086 Sheet printing is selected 1088 The mail box is full 1104 The paper is too small 1083 The paper is too small 1083 The roll is empty 1087 This paper cannot be used 1086 Top cover is open 1107 Turn on the media take up unit 1092 Unknown file 1107 Wrong ink tank 1096 Wrong maintenance cartridge 1102 Wrong x printhead x is L R or not displayed 1100 x pri...

Page 1099: ...092 Borderless printng not possible 1092 Paper position not suitable for borderless printing 1092 Paper mismatch Cause Corrective Action You tried to print a test pattern for printer adjustment on several sheets but sheets of different types or sizes of paper were used When printing a test pattern for adjustment use sheets of the same type of pa per in the required quantity Press or to select Chan...

Page 1100: ...ect Stop Printing and then press the OK button 2 Either change the type of paper specified in the printer driver settings or replace the loaded paper and change the paper type setting on the printer See Loading and Printing on Rolls P 3 See Loading and Printing on Sheets P 6 Press or to select Print and then press the OK button to resume print ing However note that this error may cause paper jams ...

Page 1101: ...printer driver is loa ded You can continue to print but note that this error may cause problems in the printing results The paper is too small Replace paper with A4 LTR vertical or larger Cause Corrective Action The loaded paper is too small When you have attempted to print a test print sheet or other printer status informa tion Replace the paper with paper of A4 Letter vertical size or larger as ...

Page 1102: ...er 1 Press or to select Change Paper and then press the OK button See Removing the Roll from the Printer P 786 See Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls P 789 2 Replace the paper with paper compatible for borderless print ing See Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls P 774 See Loading Rolls in the Printer P 777 The printer now starts printing the print job Make sure the roll width selected in the dialo...

Page 1103: ... resume starting from the page on which the error occurred See Loading Sheets in the Print er P 802 Because the Platen is soiled with ink or other substances the size of the clear film cannot be detected Open the Top Cover and clean the entire Platen See Cleaning Inside the Top Cover P 1026 Insufficient paper for job Cause Corrective Action The printer has received a print job longer than the amou...

Page 1104: ...t be used Cause Corrective Action Paper that is too large for the printer has been loaded Lift the Release Lever and load paper of the correct size See Paper Sizes P 771 Paper that is too small for the printer has been loaded Lift the Release Lever and load paper of the correct size See Paper Sizes P 771 Paper has been loaded that is too small to print the test pattern for printhead adjustment or ...

Page 1105: ...hing the Roll Holder to Rolls P 774 See Loading Rolls in the Printer P 777 3 If no barcode was printed on the roll specify the type of paper See Changing the Type of Paper P 784 4 When you have selected ManageRemainRoll On in the control panel menu and a barcode is not printed on the roll also specify the paper length See Specifying the Paper Length P 785 5 If Not finished printing Finish printing...

Page 1106: ...tive Action A print job for printing on sheets was sent when a roll is loaded 1 Press or to select Remove Roll Paper and then press the OK button to stop printing 2 After removing the roll load and print on a sheet of the type and size of paper you have specified in the printer driver See Removing the Roll from the Printer P 786 See Loading and Printing on Sheets P 6 Press or to select Stop Printi...

Page 1107: ...e it parallel to the right Paper Alignment Line and the trailing edge of the sheet to make it paral lel to the paper alignment line under the Pa per Retainer See Loading Sheets in the Printer P 802 Note To disable this message if it is displayed repeatedly despite reloading paper for example choose Off or Loose in the Skew Check Lv setting of the printer menu However this may cause jams and printi...

Page 1108: ...ift the Top Cover and remove the foreign object 2 If Not finished printing Finish printing remaining jobs is shown on the Dis play Screen press the OK button Printing will resume starting from the page on which the error occurred You are not using the print er under the recommended environmental conditions for the paper Use the printer only where the recommended environmental conditions for the pa...

Page 1109: ...s damaged Contact your Canon dealer for assistance A paper jam has occurred and the roll cannot be rewound Remove the paper from the Media Take up Unit Press the OK button to clear the error Printing will stop momentarily if an error involving the Media Take up Unit occurs If you prefer printing not to stop set Skip Take Up Err to On However note that this error may cause paper jams and affect the...

Page 1110: ...atible for borderless printing as follows 1 Press or to select Change Paper and then press the OK button See Removing the Roll from the Printer P 786 See Removing the Roll Holder from Rolls P 789 2 Replace the paper with paper compatible for borderless printing See Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls P 774 See Loading Rolls in the Printer P 777 The printer now starts printing the print job For info...

Page 1111: ...rt the roll firmly until it touches the flange of the Roll Holder See Attaching the Roll Holder to Rolls P 774 Select None when you have set Detect Mismatch in the Control Panel menu to Warning However note that this error may affect the printing quality Press or to select Print With Border and then press the OK button to continue printing The document will be printed with a border Press or to sel...

Page 1112: ...t is low with a new Ink Tank See Replacing Ink Tanks P 984 No ink left Cause Corrective Action There is no ink left Open the Ink Tank Cover and replace the Ink Tank for which the Ink Lamp is flashing See Replacing Ink Tanks P 984 Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected Cause Corrective Action Ink level detection cannot work cor rectly if you use refill ink tanks The refill ink tank...

Page 1113: ...e error is cleared Ink tank is empty Cause Corrective Action There is no ink left in an ink tank Open the Ink Tank Cover and replace the Ink Tank for which the Ink Lamp is flashing See Replacing Ink Tanks P 984 Error Message Messages regarding ink iPF8300 Close Ink Tank Cover 13 1095 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1114: ...nk of the indicated color in the printer Load or reload the Ink Tank See Replacing Ink Tanks P 984 There is a problem with the Ink Tank Replace it with a new Ink Tank See Replacing Ink Tanks P 984 Wrong ink tank Cause Corrective Action The Ink Tank in the printer is incompatible Load an Ink Tank specified for use with the printer See Replacing Ink Tanks P 984 Error Message Messages regarding ink N...

Page 1115: ...s soiled Otherwise you have loaded colored paper Press the OK button to clear the error Load unused paper compatible with color calibration See Types of Paper P 768 The test pattern was printed too faintly Press the OK button to clear the error Take steps to remedy faint printing See Printing is faint P 1057 Direct sunlight or strong lighting may be shin ing on the printer and causing the sensor t...

Page 1116: ...tch on the platen was set to the side opposite when a borderless print job was re ceived Before borderless printing set the blue Switch on the platen to the side See Setting the Blue Switch on the Platen P 1063 Blue platen switch is dirty Cause Corrective Action The blue Switch on the platen is dirty Open the Top Cover and clean the blue Switch on the platen See Cleaning Inside the Top Cover P 102...

Page 1117: ...ransparent film is loaded that cannot be used for automatic feed amount adjustment Press the OK button to clear the error and then adjust the feed amount manually See Manual Banding Adjustment Adj Quality P 848 Check printed document Cause Corrective Action The Printhead nozzles are becoming clogged If printing is faint clean the Printhead See Cleaning the Printhead P 999 Error Message Messages re...

Page 1118: ...ess the OK button to clear the error We recommend using a type of paper that you often use other than film for Printhead adjust ment See Automatic Adjustment to Straighten Lines and Colors Head Posi Adj P 839 PHeads wrong pos Cause Corrective Action The printheads are installed in the wrong positions Open the Top Cover and switch the Printhead used once in the right side to the right side Switch t...

Page 1119: ...rinthead L is displayed and the Printhead R if Printhead R is dis played If neither left or right is indicated install both Printhead L and Printhead R See Replacing the Printhead P 1000 Execute printhead cleaning Cause Corrective Action The Printhead noz zles are clogged Follow these steps to clean the Printhead 1 Stop printing by pressing or to select Stop Printing 2 Clean the Printhead See Clea...

Page 1120: ...w Cause Corrective Action The Maintenance Cartridge is almost full You can continue to print but prepare a new Maintenance Cartridge to use when the message for replacement is displayed No Maintenance Cartridge capacity Cause Corrective Action The Maintenance Cartridge cannot absorb enough ink for Printhead cleaning or other operation After confirming that the printer has stopped operating replace...

Page 1121: ...tridge has been installed Install an unused Maintenance Cartridge specified for use with the printer See Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge P 1015 Error Message Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge iPF8300 Maintenance cartridge problem 13 1103 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1122: ...d the printer will restart The mail box is full Cause Corrective Action There is no more space on the printer s hard disk Press the Stop button and stop printing Delete print jobs from the queue See Managing the Job Queue Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs P 719 Delete unneeded jobs stored in personal boxes box numbers in the range 01 29 See Deleting Saved Jobs P 731 Mail box full Now printing with...

Page 1123: ... stored Cause Corrective Action 100 jobs are stored in the personal box Delete unneeded jobs stored in personal boxes See Deleting Saved Jobs P 731 Mail box full Delete unwanted data Cause Corrective Action 100 jobs are stored in the personal box Delete unneeded jobs stored in personal boxes See Deleting Saved Jobs P 731 Error Message Messages regarding the hard disk iPF8300 Mail box nearly full 1...

Page 1124: ...own the error code and message turn off the printer and con tact your Canon dealer for assistance Hardware error xxxxxxxx xxxx x represents a letter or number Cause Corrective Action The last portion of roll paper was used during a print job The paper was not advanced because the trailing edge is ta ped to the roll Turn off the printer and remove the roll from the printer before restoring power Fa...

Page 1125: ... is displayed you can continue to use the printer for some time Contact your Canon dealer for assistance Parts replacement time has passed Cause Corrective Action It is past the recommended time to replace consumables for which service is required Contact your Canon dealer for assistance Unknown file Cause Corrective Action Data sent to keep the printer up to date such as paper information is in t...

Page 1126: ...ive Action Direct sunlight or strong lighting may be shining on the print er and causing the sensor to malfunction Take steps to ensure the printer is not used when ex posed to direct sunlight or strong lighting The performance of a sensor inside the printer may be im paired Contact your Canon dealer for assistance Error Message Other Messages Calibration There is a problem with the multi sensor i...

Page 1127: ...Appendix How to use this manual 1110 Disposal of the product 1120 Appendix iPF8300 14 1109 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1128: ...button Control panel messages Example Head Cleaning is displayed Software interface items menus and buttons Example Click OK Keyboard keys Example Press the Tab key Part names Names of printer parts are indicated as follows in this user manual Printer part names Example Open the Top Cover Cross reference Other pages or manuals that provide related information are indicated as follows in this user ...

Page 1129: ...ht CANON INC 2010 Unauthorized reproduction of this user manual in whole or part is prohibited May we request Thank you for understanding the following points The information in this user manual is subject to change without notice We strive to ensure accuracy of information in this user manual but if you notice errors or omissions please con tact us Searching Topics You can find information in top...

Page 1130: ...arched for will be highlighted in the topic To review multiple topics at once select the check box of desired topics and click the Apply button Appendix How to use this manual Searching Topics iPF8300 14 1112 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1131: ...ng a group of topics in the manual When you access printable HTML versions of the content from section titles in the table of contents you can specify a group of topics to print 1 Click a section title in the table of contents Here Basic Printing Workflow is used as an example 2 Click Access to the HTML for printing in the title area Appendix How to use this manual iPF8300 HTML Version of the Manu...

Page 1132: ...played together in HTML format ready for printing 3 Clear the sections you will not print and click the Apply button Appendix How to use this manual HTML Version of the Manual for Printing iPF8300 14 1114 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1133: ...s you can specify a group of topics to print 1 Click a section title in the table of contents Here Basic Printing Workflow is used as an example 2 Under Basic Printing Workflow click Printing Procedure Appendix How to use this manual iPF8300 HTML Version of the Manual for Printing 14 1115 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1134: ...g in the title area The topics in Printing Procedure are displayed together in HTML format ready for printing Appendix How to use this manual HTML Version of the Manual for Printing iPF8300 14 1116 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1135: ...g box as follows depending on your computer s operating system Windows In Windows right click anywhere in the explanation area except on a figure or a link In the shortcut menu click Print to display the Print dialog box Appendix How to use this manual iPF8300 HTML Version of the Manual for Printing 14 1117 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1136: ... holding the Ctrl key In the shortcut menu click Print Frame to display the Print dialog box 2 Specify conditions as needed and then click Print Windows or Print Macintosh Windows Appendix How to use this manual HTML Version of the Manual for Printing iPF8300 14 1118 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1137: ...tosh Note To print only individual topics that are displayed use this method Appendix How to use this manual iPF8300 HTML Version of the Manual for Printing 14 1119 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1138: ...Disposal of the product WEEE Directive 1121 Appendix Disposal of the product iPF8300 14 1120 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1139: ...WEEE Directive Appendix Disposal of the product iPF8300 WEEE Directive 14 1121 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1140: ...Appendix Disposal of the product WEEE Directive iPF8300 14 1122 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1141: ...Appendix Disposal of the product iPF8300 WEEE Directive 14 1123 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1142: ...Appendix Disposal of the product WEEE Directive iPF8300 14 1124 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1143: ...Appendix Disposal of the product iPF8300 WEEE Directive 14 1125 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1144: ...Appendix Disposal of the product WEEE Directive iPF8300 14 1126 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1145: ...Appendix Disposal of the product iPF8300 WEEE Directive 14 1127 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1146: ...Appendix Disposal of the product WEEE Directive iPF8300 14 1128 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1147: ...Appendix Disposal of the product iPF8300 WEEE Directive 14 1129 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1148: ...394 405 Layout Sheet 232 M Main Pane 486 Main Sheet 209 Maintenance Cartridge 1024 1102 Media Take up Unit 821 831 883 889 N Navigate 977 979 NetWare network 964 Nozzle 238 508 839 998 O Open Preview 178 202 210 235 243 Orientation 184 186 390 405 Output Method 230 P Page Setup Pane 506 Page Setup Sheet 227 PosterArtist 175 Power 883 Print Job Log 422 431 Print area 81 Printer Driver Settings 196 ...

Page 1149: ...U Utility Sheet 238 V Vacuum Strength 852 W When to replace 1000 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Page 1150: ... CANON INC 2010 Downloaded from ManualsPrinter com Manuals ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for imagePROGRAF iPF8300

EBS 2500 Installation And First Startup preview
2500
Brand: EBS Pages: 4
NCR 7156 Setup And User Manual preview
7156
Brand: NCR Pages: 38
Panasonic Workio DP-C262 Scanner Manual preview
Workio DP-C262
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 54
Panasonic KXMB2000E Important Information Manual preview
KXMB2000E
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 12
Panasonic KX-MB2000 Important Information Manual preview
KX-MB2000
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 12
Panasonic KX-MB1500E Important Information Manual preview
KX-MB1500E
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 8
Panasonic KX-FLB851 - All-in-One Flatbed Laser Fax Guía De Referencia Rápida preview
KX-FLB851 - All-in-One Flatbed Laser Fax
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 28
Panasonic KX-FLB751 Information Manual preview
KX-FLB751
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 2
Panasonic DP-MB350 Quick Reference Manual preview
DP-MB350
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 12
Panasonic DP-MB300 Quick Reference Manual preview
DP-MB300
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 12
Panasonic KX-P8415 Operating Instructions preview
KX-P8415
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 3
Panasonic KX-P7105 Operating Instructions preview
KX-P7105
Brand: Panasonic Pages: 4
Unitech MP300 Quick Start Manual preview
MP300
Brand: Unitech Pages: 2
Keeler Vantage Plus Instructions Manual preview
Vantage Plus
Brand: Keeler Pages: 25
GE TermiNet 300 Beginner'S Manual preview
TermiNet 300
Brand: GE Pages: 16
Oki ES5460 User Manual preview
ES5460
Brand: Oki Pages: 128
Printronix P9212 Setup Manual preview
P9212
Brand: Printronix Pages: 206
Kyocera 5003i Operation Manual preview
5003i
Brand: Kyocera Pages: 708

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands